Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011...
230 downloads
722 Views
10MB Size
Report
This content was uploaded by our users and we assume good faith they have the permission to share this book. If you own the copyright to this book and it is wrongfully on our website, we offer a simple DMCA procedure to remove your content from our site. Start by pressing the button below!
Report copyright / DMCA form
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
Hawai'i Creole English
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
This page intentionally left blank
Hawai'i Creole English Viveka Velupillai
paigrave macn
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
A Typological Analysis of the Tense-Mood-Aspect System
© Viveka Velupillai 2003
No paragraph of this publication may be reproduced, copied or transmitted save with written permission or in accordance with the provisions of the Copyright, Designs and Patents Act 1988, or under the terms of any licence permitting limited copying issued by the Copyright Licensing Agency, 90 Tottenham Court Road, London W1T 4LP. Any person who does any unauthorised act in relation to this publication may be liable to criminal prosecution and civil claims for damages. The author has asserted her right to be identified as the author of this work in accordance with the Copyright, Designs and Patents Act 1988. First published 2003 by PALGRAVE MACMILLAN Houndmills, Basingstoke, Hampshire RG21 6XS and 175 Fifth Avenue, New York, N.Y. 10010 Companies and representatives throughout the world PALGRAVE MACMILLAN is the global academic imprint of the Palgrave Macmillan division of St. Martin's Press, LLC and of Palgrave Macmillan Ltd. Macmillan® is a registered trademark in the United States, United Kingdom and other countries. Palgrave is a registered trademark in the European Union and other countries. ISBN 0-333-99340-3 This book is printed on paper suitable for recycling and made from fully managed and sustained forest sources. A catalogue record for this book is available from the British Library. Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data Velupillai, Viveka, 1974Hawai'i Creole English : a typological analysis of the tense-moodaspect-system / Viveka Velupillai. p. cm. Includes bibliographical references and indexes. ISBN 0-333-99340-3 (cloth) 1. Creole dialects, English—Hawai'i—Verb. I. Title. PM7874.H3V45 2003 427'.9969—dc21 2003048291 10 12
11
9 10
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 09 08 07 06 05 04
1 03
Printed and bound in Great Britain by Antony Rowe Ltd, Chippenham and Eastbourne
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
All rights reserved. No reproduction, copy or transmission of this publication may be made without written permission.
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
For my grandmothers Indira and Christina and in memory of my grandfathers V. Kumaraswamy and Roy
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
This page intentionally left blank
Contents
vii
List of Tables
ix
List of Figures
x
List of Abbreviations
xi
Acknowledgements
xiv
1 Introduction 1.1 Earlier studies on TMA in HCE 1.2 HCE and the study of creole languages 1.3 The present book Notes
1 4 6 8 11
2 Studying HCE 2.1 General background of HCE 2.2 Data Notes
12 12 15 30
3 The Framework of this Study 3.1 Tense 3.2 Aspect 3.3 Modality 3.4 General on notations Notes
32 32 36 40 42 44
4 Tense Categories in HCE The base form 4.1 The -5 form 4.2 The past tense 4.3 4.4 The future tense On the copula 4.5 Summary 4.6 Notes
45 45 49 52 55 64 67 69
vu 10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
Contents
5 Aspectual Categories in HCE 5.1 The construction wen VERB 5.2 Intraterminals in HCE Habitual 5.3 5.4 The completive marker pan 5.5 The construction had VERB Intensification 5.6 Summary 5.7 Notes
70 70 81 94 97 99 102 103 106
6 Modality in HCE 6.1 Imperative versus try VERB 6.2 can VERB cannot versus no can 6.3 6.4 have to and gotta igaDa) better VERB 6.5 must and might 6.6 like (VERB) 6.7 Summary 6.8 Notes
109 110 112 116 119 125 127 132 132 134
7 The Basic TMA System in HCE 7.1 Summary of the HCE TMA system 7.2 HCE and creole studies Notes
136 137 152 162
Appendix; 1: Texts
163
Appendix; 2: Verbs Occurring with wen: Types & Tokens
191
Bibliogra]phy
193
General Index
200
Example Index
211
Informant Index
214
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
viii Contents
1.1
Tsuzaki's (1971:333) four sentences
4
5.1 -ing forms in the written material corpus
87
7.1
The TMA features of HCE in a cross-linguistic perspective
138
7.2
Differences and similarities between HCE and SE aspect
153
7.3
Differences and similarities between HCE and SE tense
154
7.4
Differences and similarities between HCE and SE modality 155
A2.1 Verbs occurring with wen sorted by frequency
IX
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
192
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
List of Tables
2.1
Overview of the islands of Hawai'i
12
3.1
Absolute tense
32
3.2
Relative tense
33
5.1
ANTerior tense
70
5.2
+PAST(+AD)
5.3
INTRAterminal with Low Focality
83
5.4
INTRAterminal with High Focality
83
5.5
-ing form proportions in the written material corpus
87
5.6
VERB-ing by genre in the written material corpus
88
5.7
stay VERB-iAig by genre in the written material corpus
88
(adapted from Johanson 2000)
HF
74
5.8
lNTRAterminal
with a very narrow IMMediate now vision
5.9
POSTterminal where the orientation point coincides with Os
5.10 POSTterminal where the orientation point is prior to O
s
5.11 POSTterminal where the orientation point is posterior to Os
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
94 100 100 101
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
List of Figures
— ® . // [-] [+] [x] <x> A
1
L J ~ A,B,C AB ACT AD ADMON ANT ASS AUX CH COMPL COMPLEM COND CONT D8 DEDUCT DESID DG DISASS E
Interruption Crucial limit A single morphological component that needs two or more components in the interlinearization f in original Marks indifference towards feature Marks existence of feature Phoneme shared with next word Inserted word(s) Viewpoint Pause in speech Beginning of passage End of passage As opposed to Individual 1, 2, 3 in a group session ABility ACTion marker ADterminal ADMONitive ANTerior Associative Auxiliary Chinese COMPLetive Complementizer CONDitional CONTinuous Digital 8 Camcorder DEDUCTive DESlDerative Dennis Gustafsson DlSASSociative Event XI
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
List of Abbreviations
EXCLAM EXIST FOC FUT GER H HAB Haw. HCE HF HPE HPS I IMM IMPER INAB INDEF INTENS INTERJ INTRA IPFV IRR Jap. JUD L LBH LF LOC LP MD MOM MOT MS NEG NF NP 0 0
OBLIG 0s
EXCLAMation EXiSTential Focality FUTure GERund High HABitual Hawaiian Hawai'i Creole English High Focality Hawai'i Pidgin English Hawai'i Pidgin Sign Language Informant IMMediate now iMPERative iNABility iNDEFinite INTENSive iNTERJection INTRAterminal Imperfective iRRealis Japanese JUDgement Low Language Bioprogram Hypothesis Low Focality Locative Localization point minidisk MOMentaneous MOTion Manuscript NEGation Nonfocality Noun phrase Orientation point or Deictic centre No opposing member of feature exists OBLiGation Primary deictic centre / primary orientation
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
xii List of Abbreviations
PAST PERM PFCT
PFV PH PI PLPFCT
POL PORT POSS POST PROG PROHIB PRON
R REL REM
REQ RESULT orS
s
SE SER SPECUL TMA UHM
VB VP W
PAST PERMissive PerFeCT Perfective Pidgin Hawaiian Filipino PluPerFeCT POLite Portuguese possessive POSTterminal PROGressive PROHIBitive Pronoun Reference point RELative REMOte REQuest RESULTative Moment of speech Standard English SERialization SPECULative Tense-Modality-Aspect University of Hawai'i at Manoa Verb Verb phrase Viveka Velupillai
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
xiii
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
List ofAbbreviations
The research reported in this book was supported by a grant from the Max-Planck-Gesellschaft zur Forderung der Wissenschaften, Munich, Germany. However, even with that generous support, it would not have been possible for me to carry out this study if it had not been for the invaluable help and encouragement of all my friends and colleagues. It would not be feasible to name every single individual I am indebted to. I am especially thankful for the time and guidance of my supervisors, Pieter Muysken and Bernard Comrie. I am very grateful for the advice and material I received from Sarah Roberts, Neal Oribio, Jeff Siegel, Michael Forman and Eric Schiller during my initial stage of confusion. I am also vastly grateful for the endless generosity of Don Hirose, Leialoha Perkins, Warren Perry, Lucy Gay, Bill Souza and Boy Kanae - without any of you I simply wouldn't have got anywhere. I am also highly indebted to everybody of Da Pidgin Coup, especially Ermile Hargrove and Kent Sakoda, for their wonderful support in both theoretical and practical matters. I have benefited greatly from discussions with Salikoko Mufwene, Osten Dahl, Bo Utas, Eva Csato and Lars Johanson: thank you all for clearing the fog for me and putting me on track. I don't know how to express in words how much I value the support I received from everybody at Alu Like, Inc. Throughout the state of Hawai'i, the staff of Alu Like, Inc. took an active interest in my project and not only made life easier for me in general, but also helped me overcome countless obstacles. It is not an exaggeration to say that this project was in fact made possible by them. I have promised to keep all informants anonymous, which prevents me from thanking each of you individually. However, you all know that there would not have been a book for me without you. I am in no way able to repay you fully for your time, efforts and marvellous hospitality. The warm aloha shown by you is an everlasting gift. There are four personal friends I would like to mention in particular. Miriam Meyerhoff has been a constant source of support and encouragement. I would also like to emphasize how important Jeanette Sakel XIV
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
Acknowledgements
and Charlotta Olofsson always are in my life: I would have gone quite batty without your friendship. A very special thanks to Dennis Gustafsson too - we both know it is a fair statement that I would not have pulled through without your patience and reassurance. Finally, I would like to thank my family for both mental and material support. Time and time again my father, mother and sisters have dealt with my various crises and have always served as a source for encouragement. Last, but by no means least, I thank my husband Magnus for standing by me in everything.
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
xv Acknowledgements
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
This page intentionally left blank
1
The aim of this book is to provide a thorough synchronic description of the Tense Modality and Aspect (TMA) system of contemporary Hawai'i Creole English (HCE). TMA marking has long been one of the grammatical areas of discussion about possible shared properties of creole languages and consequently also of creole genesis. The present description is intended to be on the language's own terms, in order to see what kind of a TMA system we will find if we do not have any prior expectations based on the fact that this language is a creole language. I also wish to place the TMA system of HCE in a cross-linguistic perspective, to treat the language as any other in the world. In doing that we will be able to see whether or not the TMA categories we find in HCE are common cross-linguistically; further studies will then be able to use the information given here to show whether they are part of a linguistic area, or whether they are shared only with specific languages. While I aim to be as theory independent as possible, describing a language necessarily involves certain theoretical considerations. In order to be as generally encompassing as possible I make use of terminology and descriptive tools found in the study of typology and language universals. Even though the study of language universals deals with the similarities between the languages of the world and the study of language typology focuses on the different types of languages we can distinguish, the two disciplines are mutually dependent on one another: In order to do language typology, it is necessary to establish certain parameters along which one is going to typologize the languages of the world. Now, the selection of any parameter as a valid parameter for cross-language typological comparison assumes that this parameter l
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
Introduction
2
Hawai 'i Creole English
Put differently, if we check for the typology of, for example, word order, we have made the assumption that word order tends to occur in languages, and might even occur in different ways in different languages. Likewise, the study of language universals is dependent on the study of language typology, given that, especially if one adopts the cross-linguistic approach to the study of language universals, in order to establish the limits of variation, one also needs to establish which variations are in fact possible. For instance, typology shows that all languages have vowels, which enables us to establish that vowels are universal to languages (Croft 1990). As has already been indicated, I make use of a cross-linguistic approach to language universals. The principal aim of the study of language universals is to find out which features are common to all or most languages. There have been two main approaches as to how the linguist should proceed in establishing universals. The generativist approach pursues detailed in-depth studies of a small number of languages,1 whereas the cross-linguistic approach (with its beginning in Greenberg's work2) emphasizes the necessity of having data from a wide range of languages. The generative approach to the study of language universals stresses the abstract nature of syntactic structures. The cross-linguistic approach advocates surveys of values for parameters, in order to establish variation across languages. Contrary to the generative approach, the "Greenbergian" approach to language universals allows for empirical testing and its conclusions are thus potentially disconfirmable (Comrie 1989). Certain predictions about language universals, for example implicational universals,3 can not be made through an in-depth study of just one or a few languages. This brings us to the issue of creole languages. I have, as mentioned above, decided to temporarily ignore the fact that HCE is a creole language while analyzing the TMA system, in order to describe the system on its own terms. We may then use the results in the discussion of whether or not Creoles form a specific type of languages. The above makes it apparent that I consider the question unanswered if the various Creoles are not described on their own terms and in a global perspective. My reasoning is that if it were the case that Creoles merely
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
is indeed valid in the analysis of a language. Thus carrying out any piece of language typology involves making certain as-sumptions about language universals. (Cornrie 1989:35)
3
show features that can be found in any other language, the discussion of a common origin, an innate grammar or similar substrate languages would be irrelevant. In order to establish whether Creoles indeed do make up a separate type of language, we first need to establish a set of parameters with which we can classify languages, or we will have no reasonable way of identifying the uniqueness of various languages, whether they are Creoles or not.4 This is true also if we claim that the uniqueness of creole languages lies in the clustering of certain otherwise common features. To give only one example, McWhorter (1998) claims that the uniqueness of Creoles is that they combine three features: little/no inflectional affixation, little/no use of grammatical/ lexical tone, semantically regular derivational affixation. Note that McWhorter's "cluster features" only very indirectly deal with TMA ([±inflection]) and will therefore not be discussed further in this book, since this is a purely descriptive study. Even if the motivation for studying Creoles were not that Creoles are more alike than other languages, but more simple or have more mixed grammars than other languages (see Muysken 1988 for a discussion of this tripartite distinction), the need for global means for determining the assumed unique-ness of creole languages is apparent. It seems to me, however, that we still do not have satisfactory evidence for treating creole languages as a structurally defined type of language (see, for instance, Mufwene 2001 and DeGraff 1999a where examples of non-creole languages having the assumed typical "creole like" features are cited). Evidence of that sort can not be obtained if we do not study creole languages in a typological context, something that has also been argued by Winford (1996). In other words, until we are able to identify a creole language on the basis of a given set of typologically defined parameters, the justification for singling out these languages relies on sociohistorical criteria. This does not mean that I necessarily reject the idea of Creoles being a special group of languages. I simply consider the question to be unanswered until we have placed Creoles in a typological perspective. And in any case, "there is nothing wrong with delineating a group of languages on sociohistorical grounds and making them the subject of one's research" (Mufwene 2001:387).
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
Introduction
Hawai 7 Creole English
1.1
Earlier studies on TMA in HCE
There have been a number of studies on the HCE TMA system, and research is constantly being done in higher education both in and off the Hawaiian Islands. Tsuzaki (1971:332ff) was the first to look at it closely in his analysis of the language varieties of Hawai'i. In an effort to try to identify and delineate the different varieties of English spoken on the Hawaiian Islands, he lists four alternative ways of expressing 'I am eating' and T ate' respectively: SE
'I am eating9
'I ate'
(a)
Me/I kaukau/eat
Me/I kaukau/eat
(b)
I stay eat/kaukau
I been eat/kaukau
(c)
I stay eating or / eating
late
(d)
I am eating
late
1.1 Tsuzaki's (1971:333) four sentences
His conclusion is that the four alternatives represent (a) Hawai'i Pidgin English (HPE), (b) HCE, (c) Non-standard Hawaiian English (NSHE) and (d) Standard Hawaiian English (SHE) in that order. For Bickerton (1980[1974], 1981, etc.) the TMA system was the starting point for his Language Bioprogram Hypothesis (LBH), a hypothesis which has led to numerous studies, and as such provoked and enhanced the field of linguistics. He lists three preverbal markers, stay, bin (which according to him developed to wen), and go, denoting nonpunctual aspect, anterior tense (which subsequently came to mark simple past), and irrealis mood respectively. The three markers were claimed to be combinable in a fixed order only, T-M-A: 1. anterior, 2. irrealis, 3. nonpunctual. Also, he argues that the zero or base form denotes simple past for action verbs and nonpast for state verbs (1980[1974]:5). When comparing HCE with Guyanese, Haitian and Sranan, he arrives at the conclusion that the similarities between the languages lie in the fact that they all have emerged in situations of heavy linguistic contact and that this has led to a pidgin language of irregular structure. He proposes that children growing up in situations where they did not have ready access to full-fledged languages had to
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
4
5
resort to their biological instincts and build up a 'new' language which will satisfactorily meet their requirements of what a language should be able to produce. Labov (1990[1970]) used the HCE tense system as an example of how young languages proceed to expand their structures in order to serve as adequate languages. He suggests that, while HPE is tenseless - though there is the option of expressing time relations by adverbial phrases (1990[1970]:16) - HCE has 'rebuilt' a tense system (ibid:23). He shows that past can be marked either by inflecting the form or by using wen VB and concludes that the choice is based on whether the verb is strong (in which case wen is optional) or weak (in which case wen is obligatory). In his study he indicates that the tenselessness of HPE is grammatically inadequate and does not allow the language to specify a particular set of information without elaboration. In other words: If we want to emphasize the temporal location of an action, we should be able to do so, but if we want to let this slide into the background, we must have means of packing away our grammatical tools so they will not interfere with some other focus. (Labov 1990[1970]:45) Labov concludes that the regularity and stability of the HCE tense system adequately fills such needs. Day (1973, 1974) discusses the Hawaiian post-Creole Continuum in the light of the HCE tense system. He observes that the unmarked or base form of the verb is often used to denote past time reference once the temporal location has been indicated either through tense on the first verb or through a time adverbial (Day 1973). He attributes this to 'tense neutralization' and concludes that it is evidence in support of Kiparsky's (1968, cited in Day 1973) claim that "tense and time adverbials belonged to the same grammatical category and were in complementary distribution" (Day 1973:309f). Roberts (for instance 1997, 1998a, and 1999) has provided thorough descriptions of the diachronic development of HCE, largely by analyzing TMA markers. In Roberts 1998a she discusses the development of the TMA markers bin/wen (past/anterior), go/gon (irrealis/future), stei (nonpunctual/progressive) and pau (completive), as well as forcomplementation. She shows that stei and pau are unique to Hawai'i, which disproves or at least poses difficulties for the claim made by
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
Introduction
6
Hawai 7 Creole English
1.2
HCE and the study of creole languages
HCE has been discussed from several perspectives. Merely to define a language as a creole raises a number of issues. To base the definition on structural criteria assumes the existence of features, or a cluster of features, typically present in creole languages as opposed to non-creole languages. Alternatively, we may suggest that Creoles are unique in the sense that they "came into existence at some point in time" (Muysken & Smith 1994, cf. also Thomason & Kaufman 1988) as opposed to languages that have developed gradually. This brings us to the discussion of whether Creoles make up their own type of language, structurally different from other (non-creole) languages. In observing a number of similarities between different Creole languages, linguists have been forced to ask themselves whether these similarities have arisen through shared origin, or similar social contexts of genesis, or whether these parallels form the unmarked case of universal grammar or if the explanation lies somewhere in between.5 The substrate hypothesis is one of the central theories in the debate over creole genesis, the others being various versions of the universalist hypothesis. Neither of these hypotheses excludes influence from the other domain, but they differ in emphasis. The former emphasizes the role of the ancestor languages of the originators, and attributes various similarities among creole languages in the Caribbean to a range of West African languages that were spoken by the slaves brought to the New World. In sum, the substrate hypothesis views Creoles as consisting of "superstrate lexicon superimposed upon native languages' grammar" (McWhorter 1997:5). The question of possible substrate influence of HCE and its ancestor languages will be briefly discussed in 2.1 below. The universalist hypothesis, on the other hand, assumes that Creoles reflect an innate universal grammar; in the specific sociohistorical conditions of Creoles, where a multitude of languages collide and no one specific language will serve as a model for innate structures to build on, a structure of the kind found in Creoles will emerge. This has been a central point of Bickerton's (e.g. 1980[1974], 1987) Language
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
Holm (1986, 1988), among others, that the HCE TMA system originated in the diffusion of Atlantic Creoles. She also argues that the development of the above listed TMA markers indicates that HCE emerged from HPE in the early 20th century.
Introduction
7
(1)
I.
MOVEMENT RULES: focused constituents are moved to sentence-initial position
II.
ARTICLES: (a) definite article for presupposed specific NP; (b) indefinite article for asserted-specific NP; (c) zero for non-specific NP
III.
TMA SYSTEMS: three preverbal free morphemes express tense, modality, and aspect respectively in that order
IV.
REALIZED AND UNREALIZED COMPLEMENTS
V.
RELATIVIZATION AND SUBJECT-COPYING
VI.
NEGATION: nondefinite subjects, nondefinite VP constituents, and the verb must all be negated in negative sentences
VII.
EXISTENTIAL AND POSSESSIVE: the same lexical item is used to express both existentials and possessives
VIII. COPULA: special locative; zero copulas with adjectives and (oftentimes) nominal complements IX.
ADJECTIVE AS VERB
X.
QUESTIONS: question particles are optional and sentence-final
XI.
QUESTION WORDS: the question-words in w/?-questions are directly preposed to the declarative for of the sentence; they are often bimorphemic. Doublets are common.
XII.
PASSIVE EQUIVALENTS: "rampant lexical diathesis" (Markey & Fodale 1980, cited in Bickerton 1981:72)
Bickerton attributes the emergence of Creoles to children born into pidgin speaking societies. The child, confronted with very unstable and incomplete structures of their parents' pidgin input, will apply his blueprint of a language and elaborate the structure of his language into a satisfactory one according to his instinct of what requirements a language should be able to meet. It should be noted that the LBH is particularly applicable to the so-called radical Creoles, by which is meant those that have undergone a sudden creolization without further major superstrate influence. In this study we shall be concentrating only on the TMA system which will let us examine if the LBH prediction (1 .in above) holds for HCE. Another issue that has been raised in connection with HCE is that of variation, a prominent topic in creole studies (see, for example, Bickerton
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
Bioprogram Hypothesis, which suggests that the structure of creole languages reflects, to a greater or lesser extent (depending on the degree of influence from the dominant lexifier language), an innate grammar common to all humans. The following features have been assumed to reflect creole grammars (Bickerton 1981):
Hawai 7 Creole English
1975 and Labov 1990[1970]). One of the dimensions is the proximity to the superstrate language. This study will let us examine whether a possible deviation in HCE from the LHB prediction with respect to the TMA system of a creole language may be due to influence from the superstrate, SE. Attention has also been drawn to the relative variability in data the linguist will have access to when studying creole languages (see, for instance, LePage & Tabouret-Keller 1985). For reasons given in Chapter 2 the present study will focus on register and geographical variation in particular. However, I strongly urge further studies on variation in HCE with respect to ethnicity, age or gender.
1.3
The present book
It is in the light of the discussion above that the necessity of analyzing HCE with typological tools and in a typological perspective becomes apparent. For that reason I will temporarily ignore the fact that HCE is a creole and simply analyze its TMA system through the means of available typological tools. We will then proceed to compare the results with the pattern proposed by the LBH as well as general cross linguistic patterns. In my investigation I will primarily use the definitions of the semantic categories involved in Tense, Modality, and Aspect that can be found in Comrie (1976, 1985), Dahl (1985), Bybee et al (1994), Palmer (2001) and Johanson (2000). The analysis is based on a large database of both written and oral material. I found it imperative to collect both written and spoken data, so as to be able to do comparisons between the two forms of language. I also sampled the oral data in a manner that would allow me to study variation with respect to geography, ethnicity, age and gender. In Studying HCE (Chapter 2) I give a general background for HCE. I also motivate the type of data sampling this study is based on. I will also outline the properties of my database and give the principles for how I do the statistics. In The Framework of this Study (Chapter 3) I give an account of the terminology used in my analysis, as well as its theoretical background. When describing the tense system of HCE I make use of Comrie's (1985) and Dahl's (1985) definitions of tense categories. Tense may be either absolute, in which case the E is placed before, after or simultaneous to the speech moment (S), or it may be relative, in which case the
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
8
Introduction
9
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
E is located before, after or simultaneous to a reference point (R). The aspectual framework consists of an event (E), which is conceived of as having a limit at each end point. E is either viewed within these limits (INTRAterminal), at the actual attainment of one of the limits (ADterminal), or after the limits (POSTterminal), cf. Johanson (2000). The terminology for the modal system is based on Palmer (1986, 2001). The basic distinction is between propositional modality, which deals with information and event modality, which deals with action. In Tense Categories in HCE (Chapter 4), the temporal reference in HCE is studied. There are two absolute tenses, the PAST (which has a special form for NEGated PAST) and the FUTure, in addition to the base form, which is simply used for what is left over. As with many other languages, HCE does not need to repeat the temporal marking throughout a narrative. Oftentimes the sequence is temporally located in the beginning by means of a tense marking device, after which the base form suffices, except when specific aspectual nuances are denoted. HCE has a past tense according to Dahl's (1985) definition, i.e. that a sentence like "the water was cold yesterday" must have the copula in the PAST tense: da Dar^- Daz OoD DDstadO. NEGated PAST is marked with neva. I will show that gon/goin(g)s denotes a future tense, rather than an iRRealis mood (cf. Bickerton 1981). I will also discuss bumbye and the possibilities of it being a near-grammaticalized form for REMote FUTure. Section 4.5 briefly summarizes the properties of copula sentences. In Aspectual categories in HCE (Chapter 5), the various aspect markers of the language are analyzed. I will show that the constructions VB-ing, stay VB-ing, and stay VB respectively are not interchangeable, but are iNTRAterminals with various degrees of FOCality, conveying specific aspectual nuances. I will also show that wen VB denotes ADterminal aspect in the past, rather than simply [-i-ANTerior]. I will discuss whether the construction had VB, which is subject to geographical variation, denotes aspect or tense. Moreover, we will see that HCE has a cOMPLetive marker pau and a portmanteau PAST HABitual marker yustu. Modality in HCE (Chapter 6) focuses on the modal system. There is a wide variety of modal categories, both deontic and epistemic. I will discuss the dual opposition of PROHlBition (no can) versus INABility (cannot) both of which share the single positive form can. There are indications that can VB has different functions on different islands, which in that case contributes to the discussion of geographical variation in creole languages. I show that the cannot/no can opposition is obligatory in the spoken language, while the written language in the
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
database does not show such consistency. Furthermore, I will demonstrate that the difference between have to VB (DlSASSociative OBLlGation) and gaDa VB (Associative OBLlGation) is that, though both denote OBLlGation, the latter associates the speaker with the obligation whereas the former does not. Moreover, the constructions must VB and might VB convey similar notions of epistemic JUDgement, though might VB is more SPECULative to its nature than the DEDUCTive must VB. I also show that the construction try VB is a separate type of request from the iMPERative. Finally, HCE has the DESlDerative marker like and the ADMONitive marker beDa VB. In my concluding chapter, The basic TMA system in HCE (Chapter 7), I give a summary of the findings of this study and propose some answers to the questions raised in this introduction. The individual TMA categories of HCE will be placed in a cross-linguistic perspective. I will also compare the HCE TMA system with the SE one, and show that there are more differences than similarities between the two. Furthermore, I will discuss the findings of this study in relation to the LBH. It will be seen that HCE does not conform to the LBH at all, a fact that carries implications for the issue of creole prototypes. Given the differences between the HCE and SE TMA systems, it seems unlikely that the discrepancies between HCE and the LBH predictions are due to decreolization. There are three different indexes for the reader to consult. Terms, languages, author names and so on are lumped together in the General Index so as to save the reader the frustration of flipping around different indexes. The other two indexes allow the reader to compare examples and informants. Since readers may be interested to use the data given in this study for their own research purposes, the Example Index lists all TMA markers and categories in all examples and texts of the book. This lets the reader check other instances of the relevant feature than those in the sections specifically devoted to the individual constructions. The Informant Index gives a four-way reference (age, gender, island, and ethnicity) to all the informants I cite in the book, so as to make it easier for those who wish to use my data for variational studies.
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
10 Hawai 7 Creole English
Introduction 11
1 2 3
4
5
6 7 8
Cf. for instance Chomsky 1965, 1975, 1976, and 1993; for an overview on generative grammar, see Cullen 1994, and Freidin 1994 on the principles and parameters framework. Cf. Greenberg 1974 and Greenberg et al. 1978. Where assumptions are made as to the existence of certain linguistic properties on the basis of the existence (or non-existence) of other linguistic properties. Such assumptions can only be done by checking the various possibilities of parameter combinations crosslinguistically; if we were to make statements in this domain based on the study of only one or a few languages, we would be at a high risk of forming a skewed conclusion: a pattern found in a well-known language may actually be of such an unusual character that it turns out to be quite exotic from a cross-linguistic point of view (Croft 1990) and thus would have little value for the definition of universals. Global perspectives, albeit of a slightly different kind than cross-linguistic studies, are needed in discussions such as Singler's (1990a) where the importance of sociohistorical factors in the study of creole languages is emphasised; if creolization is a social process (e.g. Mufwene 2001), the history of creole speaking communities has to be investigated in the light of (social) macro tendencies. For the sake of brevity, I have chosen to exemplify only a few of the theories on pidgin and creole genesis. For thorough discussions on the various theories in this domain, see for instance Muysken & Smith (1986), Romaine (1988), Arends etal (1994), McWhorter (1997). Most commonly defined as "the process by which pidgins develop into creole languages" (Adone & Vainikka 1999:76) in one generation. See section 2.2.2.3 for an overview on the transcription conventions used in this study. Which should not be confused with ACTion marker go (but cf. Sato 1985).
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
Notes
Kaua'i ^Ni'ihau
O'ahu
"4k Kbunaha —
A
KatvAui
Lana'i 1
EU9!
Kaho' t'olawe K
Hawai'i;
2.7 Overview of the islands of Hawai4 i
2.1
General background of HCE
The Hawai'i Creole English of today is used by about 600000 speakers throughout the Hawaiian Islands (Grimes 1996:139). In other words, roughly half of the ca 1.2 million inhabitants of the islands use some form of HCE (albeit not necessarily the same variant1) as their native language. An additional 100 000 HCE speakers are found on the USA Mainland, especially along the West Coast, in Las Vegas (Nevada), and in Orlando (Florida) (Grimes 1996:139). 12 10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
Studying HCE
With the arrival of Captain Cook in 1778 and the subsequent stream of foreigners, Hawai'i was opened to the large scale trading and infrastructure of the western world. The Hawaiian Islands were an ideal middle stop for the Pacific fur trade, and later also the sandalwood trade, running between the Northwest coast of America and the greater ports of China, the so-called "Alaska-Hawaii-Canton run" (Carr 1972:4). These frequent visits of predominantly American ships (Kuykendall 1968) were initially limited to the same few localities, mainly Kealakekua Bay on Hawai'i (the Big Island) and Waimea on Kaua'i. Almost immediately after the "discovery" of Hawai'i, Pidgin Hawaiian (HP) emerged as the first lingua franca on the islands (Roberts 1995), when the demand for a communicative tool arose. Christian missionaries, for the most part from New England, landed on Hawai'i for the first time in 1820 in Kailua on the island of Hawai'i and immediately started their work trying to spread not only religion, but also literacy and education in general. English schools were the first schools to emerge, but they came to be restricted to the education of the royal family. In the middle of the 19th century free common schools educating in Hawaiian were set up by the government throughout the Hawaiian Islands. However, the English language steadily gained prestige, being, by 1850, the "principal medium of business, government, and diplomacy" (Kuykendall 1968:360), and schools for teaching English were set up. The arrival of the first missionaries virtually coincided with the beginning of the whaling period (ca. 1820-60), another factor that brought foreigners and foreign languages to the Hawaiian ports. Apart from that, many Hawaiians enrolled on these whaling ships, thus living in a milieu of intense language contact during the years they spent on board. With the increasing number of ships arriving in Hawai'i, the demand for supplies increased, and, as a consequence of that, large scale enterprises started to emerge. The plantation era was initiated by William Hooper, who founded the first sugar plantation in 1835 in Koloa on Kaua'i. A plantation's social organization would typically have haoles ('white person')2 as both owners and lunas (foremen), and Hawaiian labour. However, the Hawaiians had, since the arrival of the westerners, been in steady decline due to new diseases introduced by the newcomers; "the native population had been reduced by at least 75 percent by 1854" (Linnekin 1991:95).3 By 1875 labour had to be imported and the plantation owners turned to East Asians and Portuguese (predominantly from Madeira
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
Studying HCE 13
and the Azores (Carr 1972:95)) in order to find people willing to work long days in a warm climate. Due to this importation of labour and the subsequent restructuring in ethnic composition, the social organization of the plantations developed into a system with haole owners, Portuguese lunas, and Asian labour. Parallel to this reorganization is the introduction of Hawai'i Pidgin English (HPE) in the late 19th century, out of which HCE grew (Roberts 1998b:9). During the 1880s and 1890s HPE expanded rapidly and rather quickly came to replace HP. The Chinese and Portuguese immigrants were the earliest major ethnic groups to arrive in Hawai'i as labour (Roberts 1997, Sato 1985). Although the Japanese eventually became the largest group of immigrants, today making up almost half of the population (ca. 40 per cent), and though Koreans and Filipinos also formed major ethnic groups, they did not influence the formation of HCE as much as the two earlier groups, since these groups rather soon provided a first generation of locally born children. As demonstrated by Roberts (1997), the children of the immigrants, i.e. the first generation locally born, were bilingual in their ancestral language (or substrate) and Hawai'i Pidgin English (HPE). This lets us assume that the substrate languages influenced the formation of HPE and subsequent developments, given that the bilingual speakers may have incorporated features from their ancestral language into the common interethnic language taking form. Education seems to have played a major role in the stabilization of HCE. Children used some form of English in the classrooms (Sato 1985:263); the teachers were often non-native speakers of English themselves and "almost all haole children attended the private schools and were therefore not available either as play partners or as language models" (Sato 1985:263). With the increase of ethnic diversity in Hawai'i, children needed a common tool for interethnic communication. Consequently, a pidginized form of English was used as a bridge between the various groups, not only in the plantation environment, but also in other social contexts. This "interethnic language" eventually stabilized in the beginning of the 20th century when the number of second generation locally born children started to increase, many of whom learned HCE natively. In the present study I will take into account both ethnic, geographic, register and age variation when analyzing the data of contemporary HCE, as described in the following section. It will be up to further studies to relate any emerging patterns to individual settlement histories of the
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
14 Hawai 7 Creole English
Studying HCE 15
2.2
Data
2.2.1 Describing a language Languages are spoken in contexts involving a multitude of elements, such as to assert one's prestige, express one's identity, share information, and so on. In other words, language is a social act and "as such is subject to the constraints of social action" (Duranti 1997:9). We interact with the world through language - and I include various semiotic entities, such as gestures and postures, etc., in the concept of language - in short, through participation (see Duranti 1997). Though I have made it a goal to be as theory-independent as possible when analyzing my data, I am aware of the fact that that is impossible in reality. Describing a language necessarily involves certain theoretical considerations. Most linguists are perfectly aware of the fact that the majority of the theoretical frameworks we lean on have been developed by linguists speaking primarily European languages. Our view of languages and what languages ought to look like therefore risks being highly biased towards European languages and their behaviour, simply because that is what we are most used to. What is more, because of this bias, many of us tend to ask such questions as in (2) when doing fieldwork: (2) a) "what does feature X or Y look like in this language?" b) "is this an instance of A or B?"
(Gilforthc.) A question such as (2) assumes either that feature X or Y is something universal in all languages and should therefore by default be discernible somehow in the language under scrutiny. The problem with an approach like that is that if we insist on trying to find instances of feature X or Y, we will inevitably end up looking for certain features that may or may not be there, simply because these grammatical categories are relevant in the theoreticalframeworkbeing used, even though they might not apply to the particular language we are investigating. Question (2) presupposes that certain instances of the language studied can only be defined as A or as B,
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
islands, to what role the individual ancestor languages may have had in the formation of HPE and HCE, and to what kinds of changes we can observe in HCE over time.
indicating that the options are precisely A and B and nothing else. The moral here is that if we limit our range of vision to A and B, we risk defining various categories in the language wrongly. In other words, what if there are instances C and D but no A and B; or what if instances A and B are irrelevant in the language, which in stead might have a, /? and y (similar to a, b and c, but not identical) that have to be rendered in A and B when translated into other languages? In that case we would be describing only the translational approximations A and B, but not the actual instances a, (5 and y. The obvious problem, then, is how to be able to do a fair description of a language, given that every language will have its own peculiarities. The linguist can prepare a questionnaire and ask the informants to fill it out, translating sentences and short narratives. The linguist may also decide to interview the informants, trying to elicit information about the language through the instincts of the informants. Or the linguist may want to record naturalistic data, just letting the recorder go while people are talking freely. All of these approaches have their shortcomings. First of all, neither of these alternatives can satisfactorily deal with the fact that the mere presence of a linguist wanting information about the language will most probably affect the informant in one way or another, Labov's so-called Observer's Paradox (Labov 1972). This is of course regrettable, but very difficult to avoid without resorting to unethical methods such as recording people without them being aware of it.4 Direct elicitation faces a variety of considerations. For instance, HCE is generally considered to be the lingo of the uneducated. When doing fieldwork I am constantly met with the attitude that HCE is just a lazy way of talking English. Consequently, many questions about constructions will be answered with an "anything goes" type of statement. Since HCE is viewed as some kind of "lazy talk", it is often considered to be entirely without structure and therefore questions relating to its structure are - from that perspective - hardly answerable. However, not only stigmatization and general condescension may trigger such answers to the linguist. It could also be an instance of politeness on the informant's side; suggestions given by the linguist sound more or less acceptable and the informant is politely letting anything pass as acceptable. A further consideration to bear in mind is that constructions may not seem especially ungrammatical when presented as single utterances. (I am sure most of us have experienced how an ordinary word or expression comes to sound more and more odd the more one repeats it, or, vice versa, how an oddly sounding word or construction comes to sound more and more acceptable for every time it is repeated.) Also,
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
16 Hawai 7 Creole English
eliciting data will generally only give the linguist information on what s/he asks about. Again we come to the issue of theoretical frameworks, and asking the right questions - how can we know that we are not getting data shaped by the questions asked, rather than data that actually represents the speaker's natural language? Merely recording naturalistic data (or at least the closest equivalences we can arrive at) data will equally not solve all these problems: the speaker's language is likely to be affected in some way by the presence of the linguist and his/her equipment. In other words, it seems to me that no single approach to collecting data will give a fair picture of the language. However, we have to start somewhere, and we try to sample the language as broadly as possible in an attempt to make our description as representative as possible. 2.2.2 Sampling and register With the above in mind I have sampled HCE as representatively as I could. I have not only got a substantial collection of written material, but also a large collection of recordings (with both naturalistic and elicited data), see 2.2.4 below for an overview of the data used in this study. It is well known that language functions differently in different contexts (cf. for instance Schieffelin 1996). When writing you have to pay more attention to your language, ensuring that the addressee will understand what you are trying to communicate. Similarly, the type of spoken language found in, for example, media, where you do not see the addressee, has certain typical features of one-sided interaction; following Bo Utas' language types5 (personal communication) I call this category performed language. When talking face to face the immediate reaction of the addressee will show you whether the message has got across or not, allowing you to, if necessary, modify your language along the way. I have therefore from the start made a distinction between types of language, dividing my material into four basic types of registers, some with subtypes, ox genres: (3) I. written language a. prose b. drama c. poetry d. dialogue II. questionnaire language (administered in written form) III. spoken language: naturalistic IV.performed language a. elicited language b. jokes, shows, etc.
The reason for these groupings will become evident in the following sections.
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
Studying HCE 17
18 Hawai 'i Creole English
Written language
2.2.2.2
Questionnaire language
Using questionnaires for linguistic fieldwork is highly effective and gratifying in many ways, since the linguist is able to ask the informant pointed questions about certain features and ways of expressions. However, as pointed out above, there are difficulties with this method
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
2.2.2.1
As mentioned earlier the distinctive feature of written language is that it relies on a complex structure to ensure that the intended message gets across to the public. This usually leads to dependence on more or less intricate constructions that are less needed in spoken language. Such constructions may make the data more linearly accessible for the linguist and more consistent than the dynamicity of spoken data. However, it may also lead to additional stylistic complexity. When it comes to HCE, sociolinguistic attitudes and the language's place in society are crucial features affecting the form and use of the written language. The mere act of writing HCE is an identity statement, since HCE is quite stigmatized and a provocation to the superstrate layer of society. Thus the written language does not only mirror the extension a language acquires when taking the step from being only spoken to being written as well,6 but it also mirrors the consciousness of writing in a low (L) language variety.7 Additionally, since there are not yet any general conventions for HCE written language, we are confronted with several types of orthography. The overall influence of Standard English (SE) on written language is a possibility that should not be ignored (cf. Adamson & van Rossem 1994). Any language will have various genres of storytelling and literacy. I have divided my written HCE data into four genres: prose, drama, poetry and dialogue respectively. These genres vary in the amount of HCE they use, as well as in their overall literary style. a. prose: any type of novel, short story or similar type of lengthy text entirely written in HCE. b. drama: all of the plays in my database have the instructions in SE but the lines in HCE (except if somebody talks "haole-like"). c. poetry d. dialogue: refers to those types of texts where the whole narrative is in SE, but all of the dialogue, i.e. everything denoting speech, is in HCE. I have chosen to treat these texts as a separate category, since the fact that the narration itself is in SE may have effects on the dialogue part of the text.8
too. First of all, we can never be certain that we have captured the gist of the language and therefore constructed the right types of questions or examples - especially not if we are new to the language. Secondly, we risk placing the language we wish to investigate under the bonds of our assumptions, which might lead us to find features we expect to be there but in fact aren't, and vice versa (informants may also be complied in this, trying to differentiate between questions in the questionnaire irrespective of whether the language differentiates between them or not). Thirdly, with a language like HCE, we risk running into several obstacles at once and when presenting Osten Dahl's9 (1985) tense and aspect questionnaire I have encountered a variety of reactions. Not only does the mere existence of a questionnaire clash with all my informants' idea that HCE is "bad talk" without any structure and is therefore not worth analyzing, but most of them hesitated, or even flatly refused, to fill it out because they were intimidated by it.10 Of the nine that did agree to fill it out, three have sent me their answers. I am hoping for at least one, possibly two more, to arrive. The answers I have received so far are of two kinds: two of the three returned to me were filled out by academics that are deeply conscious of the place of HCE in society, and its place in the ongoing discussion of creole languages. This may or may not affect their responses. The third was filled out by a small group of college students, who collaborated with the questionnaire. Their language is probably less affected by SE and more affected by the fact that they filled out the questionnaire together. Observe that with "affected by SE" I mean both positive and negative influence, i.e. I mean both the convergence towards SE and the moving away from it, since an informant's conscious attempt to make his/her language less SE like is as much an external influence as it is if s/he tries to make HCE more SE like. 2.2.2.3 Spoken language Spoken data is different in all senses from written data. The stativity of written sources is eliminated, and instead we have the dynamic language that speakers use in real time. Although written data reflects "real language", there is always the risk that certain constructions will be used with different proportions or in different ways than they would in spoken language. In this sense spoken naturalistic data is the closest we can come to the language as it is actually used by its speakers in every day life. Analyses are, however, complicated by the various extralinguistic factors (see for instance Duranti 1997) that have to be
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
Studying HCE 19
considered. Also, the linguist is handicapped by the fact that it is impossible for him/her to be present in all types of situations, and that speakers will most probably be aware of his/her presence. In order to sample data that is as representative as possible, we must therefore make use of both interviews and free speech, and I have divided my spoken data into two types: a. naturalistic language, by which I mean recording sessions where the informant just "talks story" and speaks freely about anything s/he feels comfortable talking about. Most commonly I start off by asking some kind of question, for example about the good old days (with Kupunas, or seniors), about fishing or hunting, about crafting, about legends, etc. Once the informant is comfortable the conversation usually gets along without much help from me. This is particularly true of political discussions, since feelings start to emerge and speakers get excited about what they are talking about. This is defined as the register type Spoken language. I have sessions with only one individual talking to me, as well as group sessions with two or more individuals who usually ended up talking to each other (since I wished to remain as much of a fly-onthe-wall as possible). b. elicited language, by which I mean interview sessions where linguistic constructions and specific examples are discussed. I define this as the register type Performed language (see below), since the setting for it, with at least one person and his/her equipment as audience, involves a performance of some kind. See below for a further discussion on the register type Performed language. In order to make the transcriptions accessible to as broad an audience as possible, I have chosen to use the standard IPA system rather than the Odo system (Odo 1975 cited in Romaine 1994a), especially since I did not in any way want to standardize the spoken language data. The Odo orthography was devised by Carol Odo in order to provide a spelling system specifically for HCE. It is based on the SE orthography, but modified and updated so as to represent HCE better. Although the Odo system has not been generally adopted by the community yet, is it taught at the University of Hawai'i at Manoa (UHM) and is used there for transcribing HCE. Since I have avoided standardization I have included speech variations in the transcriptions. Observe that I only use the IPA for transcriptions of speech and not when I refer to the grammatical construction. In other words, I differentiate between the construction
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
20 Hawai 7 Creole English
wen VB (stay VB-ing, bumbye, like VB etc.) and the utterance wen VB (stei VB-iy, bambai, laik VB, etc.). I have rendered the flap [r] as D in accordance with the Odo system for the constructions (not the utterances of) gotta/gaDa VB and better/beDa VB to avoid that the reader confuses [f ] with . In an effort to keep the transcriptions as close to the original sound files as possible, I have decided to transcribe in a manner that will hint at sandhi and phonotactic patterns by using the Odo system phonemically. This means that there is a lot of variability between and within texts in how words are transcribed, because I am trying to stay true to the phonological variation I encountered. Also, in an effort to illustrate the general melody word boundaries have been determined by phonotactic patterns rather than by their SE equivalents. Thus I will render ^fut'pnnts/ 'foot prints' asfutprints and not Jut prints. Although I have separated entities which make whole words in my view, the speech flow does not conveniently provide all the relevant boundaries. Words melt into one another and there is considerable sandhi. In order to provide easily understandable examples, I have chosen to separate words, and indicate shared phonemes with [ ]. An utterance like dcedce "that day" will be transcribed as dcefd] dee. Even though a dialogue between people is seldom structured (except possibly when an appointed chair organizes it) it is beyond the scope of this study to do in depth studies of turn taking, interruptions, etc. In order to give a rough idea of the flow I have used "—" to mark interruptions, either when a second speaker interrupts the first one, or when a speaker interrupts him/herself. I have followed the EUROTYP Guidelines glossing principles (Bakker et al. 1993), which are based on Lehmann (1983). I provide free translations for all examples. The translations for written material examples have been confined to footnotes in order to make them as unobtrusive as possible, since they are merely free translations and only serve to provide the reader with the approximate meaning of the sentence, in case the reader should not have understood that by him/herself. Hence, nuances and subtleties may not have been correctly represented. I apologize to all authors of the texts cited for any misinterpretations and clumsy translations. All recordings have prior oral (the O'ahu sessions) or written (all other sessions) consent.
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
Studying HCE 21
2.2.2.4 'Performed language " In this category I count anything that is a more or less "voiced" or "read" (i.e. not written) high (H) language variety. When performing, or giving talks, speakers will have to address their audience in a manner similar to the written language situation; the social situation demands a stricter type of language than merely "talk". With an ordinary conversation the speaker is constantly given feedback from the hearer, in form of verbal responses, body language, or the likes. When performing, however, the hearer(s) are not in direct contact with the speaker, and thus the language has to be formed so that there will be as few misunderstandings as possible. Examples of this are the read poems I have in my database, some accompanied by music. Here the language is quite different from ordinary spoken language, although it is conveyed to us in a spoken form. Many of the poems have been written down beforehand and are merely read; however, even if the performer doesn't have a manuscript to read from, this type of language would qualify as something different than ordinary spoken language. I also include elicited language in this category for reasons already hinted at. In an elicitation context, the informant is deeply conscious of his/her language, which may possibly affect it. The informant will have to think and discuss his/her language, aware of the fact that what is said is being recorded and will be used as reference. When discussing his/her language, a person may or may not voice certain general assumptions or prejudices about the language. However, we have to keep in mind that such issues are apt to come to the surface in precisely the elicitation setting. Example (4) serves as an illustration. The informant, being very aware of the position of HCE versus SE and the stigmatization of the former, demonstrated the effects of covert prestige:11 he rejected anything that he found too SE-like, as for instance -ing forms and cannot, claiming that "Pidgin12 is all about cutting short". However, he was not aware of the fact that he himself was using the forms he rejected, in exactly the same positions and with the same function as other HCE speakers do. Having failed to get the informant to acknowledge any -ing form so far (with both dynamic and stative verbs), I gave the following example:1 (4) W : o(r) 6a hos ste staendin ova dea | rait or the horse stand over there right
nau now
Or: the horse stay standing over there right now.
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
22 Hawai 7 Creole English
Studying HCE 23 | Sat no saun rai[t] tumi | da ho[s] sts s— | that NEG sound right to me the horse
aah ah
| 1 si | if ju laik tel 6a laedi sts ova (let's) see if you DESID say the lady LOC over
dea— there
o 6a 6aa— | hau ju wud sae 6aet | orait wi go or the the how you would say that all.right we go bask tu back to
dastwan leira | ai that one later I
stetinkirj ov dast wan think of that one
Ah, that doesn't sound right to me ... the horse stay s— ah ... let's see ... if you want to say "the lady is over there" ... or the ... the ... how would you say that... all right we'll go back to that one later. I'm thinking about that one. VV:jaeh yeah
| kae OK
| hi katin 6a wud he cuUNTRA1""7 the wood
Yeah. OK: he cutting the wood I: (n)okae | nau ju ju meikin OK now you you make.lNTRAHF
steitments statements
o or
ju you
aeskirj kwestisns ask.lNTRAHF questions OK, now, are you making statements or asking questions? VV: steitments statements Making statements L: okae | 6a— 6aet na?— no OK the that NEG NEG 6a the
saun rait sound right
hiz'4 he's
katin cut.lNTRA^
wud wood
OK, the—that doesn't sound right "he's cutting the wood". VV: kae OK
(MJ50K)15
It should be noted that the informant first gives a staj^LOCative example, but stops himself and starts over. In the example above we see that the informant actually uses the -ing form repeatedly, and the stay VBing is used in precisely the same type of context as could be expected if it, as I will show in section 5.2 below, is an INTRAterminal of very high Focality. This type of rejection of anything the informant judged at
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
I: ah ah
24 Hawai 'i Creole English
2.2.3 Variation Most linguistic communities tend to develop language variants confined to certain geographical areas, social groups, ethnic groups or age groups. In order to chart the variation in HCE, I have sampled different geographical areas (in this case various islands, see 2.2.3.2 below), different ethnic groups (see 2.2.3.1 below), and both males and females at various ages (the youngest being 22 years at the time of the recording and the oldest 95). This does not mean that there has to be variation with respect to these parameters, but that I consider the question unanswered until different areas and other possible variation domains are sampled and checked. It is important to keep in mind that no language is entirely monolithic in its use or functions. Consequently any language description will be an approximation and should not be taken as a strict yardstick of how the language is or should be employed. In fact, a language could be argued to be a more or less tightly or loosely knit bunch of idiolects. However, much as we would like to, it would be impossible for linguists to accurately render all possible uses and functions of the languages we are trying to describe, and we are forced to give an average, or a common denominator if you like, of what the speakers of a language community use. Nevertheless, with that said, it is noteworthy that there in fact is a rather striking uniformity to my data, as shall be seen in the individual chapters. Whether the reason for my not encountering much variation is because HCE as a whole has little variation (which I find unlikely) or because I am analyzing only the TMA system of HCE and that does not have much variation (which I find more likely) is for future research to determine. Needless to say, this study should not in any way be taken as a normative description of the HCE TMA system. 2.2.3.1 Ethnolects In societies with a multiethnic composition speakers may use their language as an identity tool in order to group themselves with the ethnic group they wish to be associated with (LePage & Tabouret-Keller 1985). Multiethnic societies may also be ethnically divided, fuelled with or without political intervention, with the various ethnic groups keeping more or less to themselves. In a society like Hawai'i, where there are two major
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
"too proper" (i.e. too SE like), happened several times during the whole session, with several types of constructions. At one point the informant caught himself saying cannot, which he had previously rejected and had claimed did not even exist in HCE, with the meaning INABility (see section 6.3 below).
divisions and then further subdivisions, there is a lot of intermingling, although ethnic groupings are retained. In this case the two major (very roughly sketched) groupings are locals versus haoles. The latter generally refers to the SE superstrate using and politically dominant group (mostly, but by no means only, white Americans), and the former refers to everybody else. Another way of putting it is that there is a general notion that locals speak HCE and haoles do not. Although almost everybody is of mixed ethnicity in Hawai'i, all informants and others I have been in touch with have a clear sense of belonging to one specific group in particular (see Bott, Bott & Fennell 1995 and Sebba & Wootton 1998). For instance, somebody calling him/herself Portagee may well be 50 per cent Hawaiian and 50 per cent Portuguese (in fact I have two informants with this precise ancestry, one calls herself Hawaiian and the other Portuguese). Then how does one decide ethnic grouping with respect to the recordings? Since we may assume that linguistic variation with respect to ethnicity will be socially transmitted, I have chosen to label the informant as belonging to that ethnic group which s/he identifies him/herself with. In other words, irrespective of the percentage the speaker has of a certain ethnicity, if s/he counts him/herself as being Portuguese or Hawaiian or Japanese (most often because s/he grew up in that specific ethnic environment) it seems reasonable to adopt that label of affinity. I have, during the interviews, tried to get detailed information as to the exact ethnic ancestry of speakers (in percentage), which group the speaker considers Mm/herself to belong to, who raised him/her (and where), as well as the subsequent family composition, such as who s/he married. Due to the uneven proportions in the database I am not able to check for variation with respect to ethnicity at this stage. However, I consider it a highly relevant topic for further research. The major ethnic groups are as listed below, with the three top ones providing the primary substrate languages (cf. above). (5) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Hawaiian Chinese Portuguese Japanese Filipino (esp. speakers of Tagalog and Ilocano) Korean
2.2.3.2 Geographical variation Most languages develop variants in different geographical areas. This would certainly be expected for a language that is spread over several islands, each of which has a highly diverse topography. Hawai'i consists of 7 major inhabited islands, as well as a number of uninhabited
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
Studying HCE 25
ones. All islands arose from volcanoes and thus have the typical topography of such landscapes, with one or two major peaks sloping down into the ocean. The various areas of each island are very different from each other, with respect to both vegetation and climate. Upcountry settlement may therefore differ considerably from shoreline settlements. Moreover, some areas are quite remote and difficult to reach. It would thus not be surprising to find dialectal variation of any major language spoken in Hawai'i whether it is a creole language or not. I have recordings of speakers from all islands in my sample, except Lana'i and Ni'ihau. Ni'ihau is privately owned and closed to anyone who does not live there or has permission to visit the island. I decided against trying to get permission to go there since it is entirely Hawaiian (the last of its kind) with little or no HCE spoken there. Lack of contacts prevented me from visiting the very small island of Lana'i; I decided to devote my time to the other islands. If there turns out to be variation with respect to island in the data, further research may have to include Lana'i and Ni'ihau.
Island
n inhabitants
% inhabitants
O'ahu17
876 156
72.3
Hawai'i (Big Island)
148 677
12.3
Mau'i
117 644
9.7
Kaua'i
58 303
4.8
Moloka'i
7404
0.6
Lana'i
3193
0.3
Ni'ihau
160
0.0
2.1 The major islands of Hawai'i (in order of population)1 (Source: U.S. Census Bureau, Census 2000 Redistricting Data, (Public Law 94171) Summary File; figures compiled and calculated by the Hawai'i State Department of Business, Economic Development & Tourism, Hawai'i State Data Center.)
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
26 Hawai 'i Creole English
2.2.4 Reliability The discussion above has made it clear that any given type of data gathering will have its drawbacks. However, the reliability of the database increases if we combine the various types of data collection. Also, the fact that many informants actually forgot that they were being recorded - once they got started talking - due to the very small and unobtrusive equipment (MD recorder and D8 camcorder), increases the reliability of the data. On repeated occasions the informant(s) simply forgot that they were being recorded and started wandering off to make coffee, getting tangled in the microphone wire. This implies that their language was reasonably relaxed and natural in the recording situation. There is no getting round that any and every informant may be affected by the mere presence of the linguist, but almost all my interview sessions were very relaxed, conducted in the informants' home or work place (i.e. in a comfortable, well known environment) and at the informants' pace. Combining an MD recorder with a camcorder allowed both backups and documentation of the physical situation, gestures, mimics, etc. While filming could be intimidating, my informants generally seemed relaxed about it, and the screen on the camcorder lessened the psychological effect of being watched through a lens for the informants. It should be mentioned that I had assistance with the equipment and didn't handle the camera myself. The advantage of that was twofold: (a) I was equally a subject of the filming as the informants, and they were thus spared the sense of being singled out; (b) talking became natural face to face interaction. When it comes to elicitation data it should be noted that some informants' analyses of their language not match their use of it. A few informants displayed active "superstrate awareness", by analyzing HCE examples as they would translate them into SE. Obviously the translation into SE is irrelevant for the use in HCE, since SE might have one form for something that has two distinct forms in HCE (cf. VB-ing and stay VB-ing which both translate into SE VB-ing, see section 5.2 below), or vice versa (cf. had VB which has to be translated into either SE PerFeCT or SE PLuPerFeCT depending on the context). It is therefore important to keep this superstrate awareness in mind when analyzing the elicitation sessions. 2.2.5 Creating a database My database was created with Microsoft Access and is designed to let me filter and search chosen features, words or strings of texts, expressions or
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
Studying HCE 27
28 Hawai 7 Creole English
(6) I. Written data 1. Ethnicity of author 2. Genre of text 3. Title II. Spoken data 1. Ethnicity of informant 2. Age at the time of the interview 3. Island the informant considered his/her home 4. Gender 5. Individual (listed only as an anonymous code)
Thus I can, for instance, filter out all occurrences of cannot in its context in the spoken language of speakers of Hawaiian ethnicity from Mau'i and compare the results with those of speakers of Kaua'i. My database consists of a total of 407 320 words. The figure is somewhat misleading, as the database contains whole texts (in order to keep the context intact), including utterances made by me, which are obviously not in HCE (despite strenuous efforts). I have therefore tagged anything not in HCE, as "nonHCE" and filtered them out from the analysis. In other words, utterances made by me, as well as SE narration or scene-setting instructions19 will not affect the figures stated for any TMA category. Having filtered out all "nonHCE" records, the database consists of 269 320 words, of which 181265 (or ca. 67 per cent) is written material and 87 642 (ca. 33 per cent or ca. 8 hours) is spoken material. When calculating the percentage of occurrences I have of course taken this uneven distribution into account. Consequently, for a feature occurring X(written material) + Y(spoken material) times in the whole database, the percentage between the two features is (X*0.67) / ((X*0.67) + (Y*0.33)) and (Y*0.33) / ((X*0.67) + (Y*0.33)). The recordings are more or less evenly spread across the islands, except for O'ahu:20 (7)
Hawai'i Kaua'i Mau'i Moloka'i O'ahu
31% 19% 19% 24% 5%
A code is given for each recorded example stating the gender, ethnicity, age (at the time of the interview), and island location of the speaker. A
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
combinations of any or all of this. I have also prepared the database to be able to group the data according to any or all of the following parameters:
Studying HCE 29
male Hawaiian 22 year old speaker from Hawai'i (Big Island) will thus be coded as MH22H. The table below specifies the coding.
M = male
EHTNICITY
ISLAND
H = Hawaiian
H = Hawai'i (Big Island)
C = Chinese
K = Kaua'i
P = Portuguese J = Japanese F = female
AGE
YY = age at the time of the interview
F = Filipino
Ma = Mau'i Mo = Moloka'i 0 = O'ahu
K = Korean 2.2 Overview of the codings for recorded examples
I have opted for rather long examples, especially from the recorded data, in order to provide as much of the context for the form in focus as possible. Also, longer examples allow the reader to see various grammatical categories of the language in use in a smooth manner. The appendix, where I have given a selection of recorded texts, allows further study of the language in use.
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
GENDER
30 Hawai 7 Creole English
1
2 3
4
5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12
13 14 15 16 17 18
Apart from the fact that speakers may be more or less basi- or acrolectal in their language, we will not exclude the possibility of geographical, ethnic, register and/or age variation. See Section 2.2.3 below. Note that this does not include the Portuguese, presumably since they too were imported as labour and therefore were considered as equals among the plantation workers. There were a multitude of other factors than disease leading to the decline of the Hawaiian population, such as emigration of Hawaiians (mainly to California) and restructuring of land (see Kuykendall 1968:328ft). Although, as Labov points out, one way of getting round the problem is to somehow "divert attention away from speech" (1972:209f), for instance by engaging the informant in topics that usually involve strong emotions. Note also that non-obtrusive equipment serves to reduce the problem of the paradox (see section 2.2.4). For a thorough examination on the difference between spoken and written language, see for instance Biber 1988 and 1994. See Michaelis (1994) and Schieffelin (1996) for case studies and discussions on the effects of literarization. Referring to the social status of that variant. This should not be confused with qualitative values; an L variant is not a linguistically inferior type of language. For more on Hawai'i Creole English as a literary language, see for example Romaine 1994a, 1994b and 1996. I am very grateful to Osten Dahl for letting me use his tense and aspect questionnaire. Possibly due to the fact that they got the idea that the questionnaire came with certain expectations as to professionalism. In other words, where the speaker accentuates his use of a L variety, or at least thinks he does, in a way that can be considered prestigious "in the sense of being favourably regarded by one's peers, and of signalling one's identity as a member of a group" (Chambers & Trudgill 1998:85). See also Labov (1972), who introduced the notion. Pidgin, with a capitol P, is the HCE name of the language, i.e. what the speakers themselves call their language. It does not mean that anybody considers it a pidgin language. For the sake of clarity, I have in this study chosen to follow my colleagues and call the language Hawai'i Creole English instead of Pidgin, even if that is not the speakers' name for their language. Although it is of course preferable to call a language by the name the speakers use, I fear that it could, in this case, create unnecessary confusion for the reader. This is an excerpt of a more than 7 minute long discussion devoted entirely to -ing forms. Note that the informant reanalyses what I said to "he is". See 2.2 for a legend of the interview codes. Although this characterization is debatable in many senses, I will not deal further with it for the purposes of this study. These figures include Sand Island, Mokauea Island, Ford Island, Moku o Loe and the North-western Hawaiian Islands. I will refrain from reproducing the Hawai'i Census 2000 figures on race (see http://www.hawaii.gov/dbedt/census2k/index.html), as the categories given there (White; Black or African American; American Indian and Alaska Native; Asian; Native Hawaiian and Other Pacific Islander) do not correspond to the generally more specified ethnic identity my informants gave. Thus the distinction made by my informants,
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
Notes
Studying HCE 31
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
differentiating between, for example, Japanese, Chinese, Filipino, and Korean would not show, as all of those would fall into the category Asian. 19 As mentioned in 2.2.2.1 some written texts may have only the dialogue in HCE, and all of the plays in my database have the stage instructions in SE. 20 This is due to initial fieldwork complications.
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
3
As shown in the Introduction there is little use for an a priori singling out of creole languages as a structural category before we have looked at them from a cross-linguistic perspective. I will therefore ignore the fact that HCE is a creole language while defining its TMA system, so as to have as open a mind as possible when I go through the data.
3.1
Tense
By tense we mean the grammatical categories which express time. In order to locate an event at a particular point in time in relation to a reference point we thus make use of these grammatical categories. In the discussion of HCE tense a number of issues come to the fore, but I will in this book only deal with those two that concern my data: the distinction between relative and absolute tense and the use of tense markers in texts. 3.1.1 Absolute and relative tense Tense may be either absolute or relative. Following the approach of a number of authors as discussed in Comrie (1985) we will regard absolute tense as an event placed in time either before, after, or simultaneous to the present moment, i.e. the speech point (S), E relative S. In other words, absolute PAST would be E before S: E
S
A
•
3.1 Absolute tense 32
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
The Framework of this Study
The Framework of this Study 33
E
R •
M
3.2 Relative tense
Apart from the two major distinctions mentioned above, the basic tense distinctions may also be more fine-grained as to the location of the situation with respect to the reference point. We may have way of defining how far away the E is from its reference point. Put differently, the event is specified as to its relative proximity to S or R, i.e. the grammatical tense category indicates not only if E is before or after S or R, but also the amount of time involved. As a result we may have, for instance, an immediate past as opposed to a remote past, or an immediate future as opposed to a remote future. Even though the objective point relative to which the factors for measuring time may vary, a quite common distinction is the hodiernal:nonhodiernal (today/not-today) one (Dahl 1984). 3.1.2 Temporal reference: means and uses As in many other languages of the world, HCE does not need to repeat the temporal marking throughout a narrative. Often the sequence of events will be temporally located in the beginning of the story by means of a tense marking device, after which the base form will suffice, except when specific aspectual nuances are denoted. The unmarked notion is E simul R (with simul indicating "simultaneous to"), for which the base form is used. The SE equivalent of the narrative chain may be either present or past time reference, depending on the context. In other words, HCE locates E simul R once at some specific time reference, and proceeds to assume consistency for that until further specifications are indicated (cf. ex. (9)). Consider example (8) where the speaker is telling us about his childhood days. The speaker locates E simul R in the past once through a tense marking (aid "I'd") and then uses only the base form after that. (8) aid go du skul a?n aefta skul ged horn wid ma brara | aen ji I'd go to school and after school get home with my brother and you
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
Relative tense, on the other hand, we regard as an event placed in time either before, after, or simultaneous to a reference point (R), E relative R. Contrary to absolute PAST, the relative past time reference would therefore be:
34 Hawai 7 Creole English gara du dis ji gada du daet aen den | wsn kam ASS.OBLIG do this you ASS.OBLIG do that and then when come aua our
miols al redi | aen saed^dae monin wi liv fo re meals all ready and Saturday morning we leave for the mauntsn | wi go ap tu mountain we go up to in da in the
da maunten abau[t] the mountain about
tu mailz ap two miles up
maunten mountain
I'd go to school, and after school get home with my brother, and you had to do this you had to do that, and then, when came to Saturday like that ... see my grandmother had all our meals all ready — and Saturday mornings we <would> leave for the mountains. We <would> go up to the mountains, about two miles up in the mountains. (MC79Mo)
If the speaker is alternating between different time references, s/he may, as mentioned above, choose to use the base form for all of them, and keep indicating with other means than tense marking which time reference s/he refers to. In example (9) we see how the speaker alternates between E simul S ( L i J ) and E before S ( L j J ) through other means than tense marking. The speaker uses the base form for everything, except when a new time reference is announced. The speaker starts out with a generic statement that holds at the moment of speech: "when you go to the volcano ..." ( L ii J ). She then indicates E before S by the copula in the PAST ( ^jj J ) "andPele was ..." which is the only tense marking in the example (see section 4.5 for some remarks on the properties of copula sentences), all other verbs being in the base form. The temporal reference holds until the next generic statement "You can't just say..." ( *-i2^ ) occurs. The second shift in temporal reference ( LJ2 ) is indicated by "the old days ..." and is maintained until "till today ..." ( L i 3 J ), which in turn is changed through "old days ..." ( L j 3 J ) and then restored by "today..." ( L i 4 J ). (9) wen ji go volkaeno j[e] when you go volcano yeah L
espejli dis ailen koz dis wea da especially this island 'cause this where the
ii (E simul S)
volkaeno stei dis we pele wi beliv | -VV: jean- | rimeinz volcano LOC this where Pele we believe remains J
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
tu ah saed^dae laig daet | si ma graenmara | get | al to ah Saturday like that see my grandmother get al
The Framework of this Study 3 5 jea | aen pele waz da godes a[f] faia so yeah and Pele was the goddess of fire so
wen when
ji (E before S)
wi go ap | no kaen meik fan jea of we go up PROHIB make fun yeah of
h^ | -Y: jean- | her yeah J
no kaen tak aenikain PROHIB say what.ever
ifju go volkaeno aua— da ol deiz if you go volcano our the old days
L
J
fa(E simul S)
L
fa(E before S)
dei tjro staf in da kreira fo laig aeknaled3 daet Ji they throw stuff in the crater COMPLEM like acknowledge that she exis | -VV: jean- | aen aeknaled3 h^ paua so exists and acknowledge her power so J
pleni gaiz many guys
| tio toras till today L fa (E simul S)
dei go ap aen de | ol deiz saekrifais jea | torae they go up and the old days sacrifice yeah today J
L
J
J3 (E before S)
is laig de tjro a bad[o] of wiski is like they throw a bottle of whiskey laik tu d3rink jea | -VV: oh!—| jeah like to drink yeah yeah
koz 'cause pleni many
laik tu—| pleni ais wen dei go dei like to many people when they go they
dei sei they say de s— they
L
Ji she Ji she
J4 (E simul S) justu PAST:HAB justu PAST:HAB
liv wis— dei leave they
tjro wiski | sam teik ah ji no benaenaz ahm taero throw whiskey some take ah you know bananas ahm taro ji no da kam you know the kind.of
staf stuff
Ji justu id she PAST:HAB
eat
When you go to the volcano, yeah, especially on this island, 'cause this is where the volcano is where Pele, we believe, remains, yeah. And Pele was the goddess of fire; so they told us, when we went up we weren't allowed to make fun of her, yeah. - Y: Yeah. - You can't just say anything if you go to the volcano. Our — in the old days they threw stuff in the crater, to like, acknowledge that she exists, and acknowledge her power, so ... Till today a lot of people they go up and — in the old days they sacrificed, yeah, today it's like they throw a bottle of whiskey, 'cause they say she used to like to drink, yeah. - VV: Oh! - Yeah, many they s— she used to like to — a lot of people, when they go they leave— they throw whiskey, some take, ah, you know, bananas, ahm, taro, you know, the kind of things she used to eat. (FH50H)
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
L
dei tel as they tell us
36 Hawai 7 Creole English
Aspect
By aspect we mean the perspective taken on an event. It is important to note that this should not be confused with tense, which places an event on a time scale, or with actionality,1 which describes the internal structure of an event or action. The previous section showed how an event is placed in its relevant time frame by relating it to various reference point devices. However, placing an event at a particular point in time does not tell us anything about the perspective taken on the event itself. In other words tense categories locate an event on the time scale, irrespective of whether that event is viewed from within, and thus has no specified boundaries, or whether it is viewed as a bounded whole. Thus, in theory, any aspect would be able to combine with any tense (although in reality that is obviously not the case), since the information expressed by is (virtually) unconnected. The same can be said of actionality (even though here too there are real life restrictions to the theoretical possibilities), which gives information about the internal structure of an event. Placing an event at a specific point in time is not pertinent to the internal structure of it. In other words, irrespective of whether an event has an internal dynamicity, such as seethe, or is undynamic, such as dwell, it can be related to various reference points and thereby be placed on a time scale. Similarly, actionality and aspect should not be confused with each other. While actionality devices give us information about the internal structure of an event, aspect devices only specifies which perspective is taken on it, i.e. which angle the event is seen from. The information given by actionality markers, therefore, does not have any impact on the information given by aspect markers. Put differently, an event will have its internal structure whether it is viewed from within or whether it is viewed as a bounded whole. Consequently, we may theoreticize that any actionality marker may combine with any aspect marker; in reality, however, certain combinations will be impossible and therefore do not exist. In defining the HCE TMA system I will make use of a framework where an event (E) is conceived of as having a limit at each end point (beginning and end). The event is then either viewed within the limits (INTRAterminal), at the actual attainment of one of the limits (ADterminal), or after the transgression of one of the limits (POSTterminal), as defined by Johanson (2000). Contrary to other frameworks that have been proposed (for example Comrie 1976, Dahl 1985, Binnick 1991, Croft in prep.), Johanson's model lets us differentiate aspect from both
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
3.2
tense and actionality. We are thus able to distinguish more precisely what has to do with aspect in an expression, without the usual complications related to tense and actionality. For instance, with Johanson's framework we can characterize the much discussed PerFeCT,2 such as has written, as an event viewed after the transgression of its relevant limit, with that limit itself temporally located before the speech moment. In this way, we have a method of sifting out what is related to tense (i.e. locating the event on a time scale) and what is actually related to aspect (i.e. the perspective taken on the event). As a result we have a language independent framework to apply on any available data. A brief summary of Johanson's terminology follows here.3 As already mentioned, the characteristic feature of Johanson's viewpoint operators is that they are concerned only with the conceptualization of the occurrence of an event (Johanson 2000:29). Thus, the viewpoint operator describes the perspective taken on an E and not the internal structure of the action itself. The main internal phases are the beginning (initium), the course (cursus) and the end (finis) (ibid.). The internal phase structure (IPS) is thus concerned with various properties of the actional content (Johanson 2000:58ff). Transformative [+t] actions have a natural turning point, a culmination, where either the initium or the finis is a crucial limit (®) and indicates where the transformation takes place. A finitransformative [+tf] highlights the end phase as the turning point of the action, such as obtain or win. The action o winning is one where a goal has been reached; the IPS implies an attempt to reach this goal. In other words, while there is an implication of a certain progress, the spotlight is on the end phase of the action. Taken further, momentaneous finitranformatives [+tf+mom] imply an "abrupt transformation without preliminaries" (Johanson 2000:61), whereas the contrasting non-momentaneous finitransformative [+tf-mom] allows the cursus to lead up to the final transformation. The difference between sneeze [+tf +mom] and freeze [+tf-mom] is thus that the former, though obviously having a certain duration in time even if short, is not readily separated into a beginning, course and end. However, freeze does have a course leading up to the transformation - it is reasonable to assume that the item freezing gradually gets colder and colder until finally frozen. The initiotransformative [+ti], on the other hand, denotes the beginning as the crucial limit of the transgression. It expresses the "concept of entering a state with that of the state itself (Johanson 2000:63), such as cover. While the act of covering
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
The Framework of this Study 37
something might take time, and thus could imply a certain duration to the action, our attention is on the beginning part of the IPS. In contrast to transformatives, a nontransformative [-t] actional content has no culmination point and no particular phase of the event that is highlighted. It can, however, be dynamic [-t +dyn] and as such have an "internal processual evolution" (Johanson 2000:64), even though its actionality is homogenous. An example of this is seethe where a gradual progress can be noted, but where no particular transformation is involved. That is, even if we observe an advancement of the item seething, there is no focus on any particular part of the IPS. With a non-dynamic nontransformative [-t -dyn], on the other hand, we have a state with no such internal evolution, such as dwell or contain. There is decidedly an evident IPS to dwell - something dwells somewhere for a certain amount of time - but we can observe no specific progress or development in the action. The above-mentioned categories can be changed through heterogenization (transformativization) or homogenization (nontransformativization) through various marking devices. For instance, the nontransformative sit is heterogenized in sit down [+tf] (Johanson 2000:68). Similarly, transformatives may be homogenized. One way of turning a [+t] into a [-t] is through quantitative reinterpretation (Johanson 2000:70), which gives it a sequential meaning. When the actional content involves a serial [+ser] reading, it is automatically homogenized in the sense that we are no longer dealing with one single event, but with a series of subevents viewed as a global whole, i.e. "recurrent transformations all through its [i.e. the global event] duration" (Johanson 2000:71). Thus a sentence like She blinked away her tears indicates that blinked away, an action that in all likelihood involved several blinks, is viewed in its totality, as a bounded whole. Johanson (2000:35f, 38ff) discusses various focality degrees and draws up the three basic distinctions high focality (HF), low focality (LF) and nonfocality (NF), although it must be understood that this is a simplification of a scalar notion. It need hardly be spelled out that the way from low focality to high focality involves a gradual increase from less and less low to a higher and higher degree. These three distinctions roughly correspond to a narrow, expanded and open range of vision around the deictic centre, O. This has to do only with the relative narrowness of view around the deictic centre, and should therefore not be confused with aspect as such. The basic viewpoint is the same,
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
38 Hawai 7 Creole English
and the difference lies not in the perspective of the E, but in the focus around the orientation point, the O. As already mentioned, although viewpoint operators may well function in combination with a variety of temporal connotations, such as [±PAST], or actionality and their modifications, such as [±mom] or [±ser], or various degrees of focality they, do not have any of these features inherently. The three viewpoint operators listed above will now be dealt with in turn. The INTRAterminal may be applied to an ongoing event in any temporal stratum, the main thing being that the course of the event overlaps with an orientation point, O, which may be the present moment, or some other point on the time scale depending on the given temporal indications. Examples of INTRA in various temporal strata would be is talking, was talking and will be talking. The difference between the three lies not in the perspective taken on them - in all cases the actions are viewed from within - but in where they are placed on the time scale: one is placed at Os, i.e. at the moment of speech; one is placed before Os and one after Os. Thus we see that locating the event at a certain point in time does not alter the angle it is viewed from. Viewing the event from within its limits hinders any kind of perception of its totality, since the "natural vantage point for observing current events is always located in the middle of what happens" (Johanson 2000:77). Note that INTRA should not be confused with duration; events of long duration may be viewed as a totality and events of short duration could be viewed from within. For instance, He sailed around the world implies an event of long duration viewed in its totality, whereas He was dropping a coin in the machine implies an even of short duration viewed from within. The concern of aspectual markers is primarily the perspective on the event, and not so much the duration of it, which belongs to the actional content. We therefore prefer the term INTRA to, for instance, durative or nonpunctual, in order to not confuse the aspectual perspective of the event with the internal duration of the action. The viewpoint operator ADterminal envisages the event in the very attainment of its crucial limit, ad terminum (Johanson 2000:29). This means that the event is viewed at the very point when it transgresses, at the instant the crucial limit of the event is reached. The event marked +AD thus denotes transformation, whereas -AD simply does not take the concept of transformation into account; -AD would only be marking the fact that the durative/punctual opposition is ignored. Consequently, the difference between Russian dobit'sja (+AD) 'attain' and dobivat'sja 'strive
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
The Framework of this Study 39
after' (-AD) is that dobivat'sja ignores any transformation whatever, whereas dobit'sja specifically tells us that the crucial limit has been reached (examples taken from Johanson 2000:135). Note that dobit'sja ~ dobivat'sja even have to be translated into different lexemes in SE in order to capture the difference in aspectual meaning. It follows then, that ADterminalis is not synonymous with COMPLetive (see section 5.4 below), since -AD ignores completion (which should not be confused with a meaning of "non-completive"). The nature of [-] features is such that -AD may denote a completed event, as in Polish czytal tq ksiqzkq 'has read this book' (Johanson 2000:136), or may denote an uncompleted event, as in Polish pisze list 'is writing, writes a letter' (Johanson 2000:137). It is irrelevant for a -AD whether the event is completed or not; the marking is there to denote the fact that the aspectual notation is in fact not specified. The same is true for RESULTative: the context in which either a +AD or a AD may occur could either convey a result or not. A -AD event may well lead to a result that will hold at the moment of speech, for instance Russian pisal 'wrote, has written, was writing, has been writing, had written, had been writing' (Johanson 2000:137); the same goes for +AD, as in the above mentioned dobit'sja 'attain'. Or, conversely, either a -AD or a +AD may ignore any result, as, for example, in Russian stroit' (-AD) -postroit' (+AD) 'build' (Johanson 2000:135). The focus of ±AD is simply where the event is envisaged with regard to the relevant limits. POSTterminal envisages the E after the transgression of its limits, as in, for instance, He has boarded the train. The event is one of a transgression from not-boarded to boarded, and we are viewing this event after this transgression has taken place. This differs from AD in the sense that "transgressing the limit means going beyond it and not only reaching it" (Johanson 2000:102). The orientation point can be situated after the initium, in which case the O is situated inside the cursus of the E. A POST[+ti] may thus express "a state that has come about through an initial transformation" (Johanson 2000:161), as in has hidden = is hiding (Johanson 2000:162). Or the orientation point can be situated after the finis, in which case the event is viewed from outside its course, as in Bulgarian napisal e 'has written' (Johanson 2000:161). Note that this is not synonymous with 'change leading to a new situation' (cf. Johanson 2000:103), which has to do with [±t] and [±dyn] (see above).
3.3
Modality
Modality can be said to deal with the attitudes and opinions expressed by the speaker, the "subjective characteristics of an utterance" (Palmer 1986:16). I will primarily use Palmer (1986, 2001) for my definitions of modality features. The basic distinctions is between propositional and
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
40 Hawai 7 Creole English
event modalities, where the former indicates "the speaker's attitude to the truth-value or factual status of the proposition" (Palmer 2001:24), and the latter relates to "events that have not taken place but are merely potential" (Palmer 2001:70). In other words, the basic distinction is between information (propositional modality) and action (event modality). PROPOSITIONAL modality describes the extent to which the speaker can or will commit him/herself to the truth of the information given, when it is not merely a recital of facts. There can be numerous reasons for maintaining a certain reserve about the truth of the matter expressed. The information could be based on an observation of something, which in turn could be based on not necessarily reliable senses. Or the speaker could have deduced the information (but not found conclusive proof for it). It could also be that the speaker is merely speculating about it, or that someone else has given him/her the information, and that the speaker is not able to definitely commit him/herself to it. Propositional modality can be divided into two subgroups: epistemic and evidential modality. Epistemic modalities make judgements that involve subjective conclusions and opinions as to the veracity of the statement. The judgements can be speculative, deductive or assumptive depending on the degree of commitment indicated on the part of the speaker. Evidentials, on the other hand, specify the type of evidence the speaker has for making a certain statement. They can be reportive (Palmer 2001:40-2) either by second-hand evidence ('Reported(2)'), by third-hand evidence ('Reported(3)') or by what is generally held to be true ('Reported(Gen)'). Or the evidentials can be sensory (Palmer 2001:43-7), with evidence from seeing (Visual), from hearing (Auditory) or from all other senses (non-Visual). EVENT modality involves action in some sense, either by the speaker or by the hearer. The two basic categories here are deontic modality, referring to external conditioning factors with the agent, and dynamic modality, referring to internal factors with the agent. Deontics may be further divided into directives, where the speaker allows or tries to initiate the hearer into action, and commissives, where the speaker certifies that an action will take place. Directives deal either with permission or with obligation. We may also place imperatives and jussives (dealing with commands and incitement to action) as well as admonitives (where the speaker issues a warning, cf. Bybee et al. 1994:179) in this category. It should be mentioned that to define deontics as related to external factors can be argued to be somewhat misleading, since the directives and commissives typically stem from the speaker and as such are subjective. However, one may claim that the (proposed) agent of the action referred to is subject to conditions originating from outside him/herself.
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
The Framework of this Study 41
The second subdivision of event modalities, dynamic modalities, which primarily deal with internal aspects of the subject, can be divided into abilitive, denoting ability, and volitive, denoting willingness. It should be noted that abilitive involves "circumstances that immediately affect" the subject (Palmer 2001:10), i.e. not only the existence of internal physical conditions, but also possibility in general. The modal categories and their various subgroups discussed can be summarized as below, with examples given where SE has a grammaticalized form for the category: (10)
PROPOSITIONALS: have to do with information EVIDENTIALS: specify the type of evidence one has for the information hearsay eyewitnessing etc. EPISTEMICS: the speaker's qualitative judgement of a piece of information speculative ("it may be that..") deductive ("it must be that...") etc. EVENT modalities: have to do with action DEONTICS: have to do with external factors DIRECTIVES: the speaker tries to initiate action obligation ("you must do it") permission ("you may do iF) imperatives ("do it!") etc. COMMISSIVES: the speaker certifies that action will take place ("you shall do it") DYNAMICS: have to do with internal factors VOLITIVES: denote willingness ABILITIVES: denote ability
3.4
General on notations
It can be very useful to note marked features as [+], and thus be able to make it clear that the construction specifically denotes the feature in question, and to note "indifferent" features with [-], which would then indicate that the feature described is simply not concerned with the opposition in question. However, "an item may also be naturally characterized by a certain value though lacking a competing item" (Johanson 2000:33), which means that although there is a feature that specifically marks something, a [+] feature, there may not be a
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
42 Hawai 7 Creole English
corresponding [-] feature. In such cases I have opted to gloss this type of one-sided marking by abandoning the [±] distinction instead of using Johanson's notation " °". By doing this we lose a way of specifically expressing +X° = "presence of X marked though no competing item exists", however, by not using such a notations we will have a smoother flow in the glossing system. The feature value will still be clearly understood by the notation system Y = "the presence of feature Y". Portmanteau markers, i.e. markers that convey several meanings at once will be glossed as A:B = "expresses A and B at the same time" (meanings A and B are both necessarily marked by this expression). That is, a construction such as yustu VB, which denotes both HABitual aspect and PAST tense, is glossed PAST:HAB. However, if a feature has to be explained by using several words, it will be glossed with " . ", i.e. as CD = "C and D must be used in order to properly render the meaning of the feature". That has nothing to do with any combination of meaning; for instance if try VB means POLite REQuest we will gloss it as POL.REQ and not POL:REQ.
In order for the reader to be able to discern whether I am talking about a defined grammatical category (i.e. employ the term metalinguistically) or simply use the word with its everyday meaning (i.e. as object language), I render the metalinguistic term with its abbreviation section in small caps, whereas the object language word is written in small caps. The reader will in this way know that the sentence "Both languages have a PAST" is to be understood as "Both languages have a tense category which denotes past time reference" and not "Both languages have a history".
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
The Framework of this Study 43
44 Hawai 7 Creole English
1 2 3
4
Also known as Aktionsart (see, for instance, Comrie 1976, Dahl 1985, Binnick 1991). Cf, for example Dahl 1985, Maslov 1988, Bybee et al 1994, to mention only a few relevant discussions on the complications of defining PFCT. It is beyond the scope of this book to contrast Johanson's terminology with other frequently used frameworks. The reader is advised to see Johanson (2000) for a thorough discussion of his terminology in relation to other studies. See Bybee et al. (1994) for the alternative terminology agent-oriented (roughly equivalent to dynamics) and speaker-oriented (roughly equivalent to deontics).
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
Notes
4
Using the general framework as defined in 3.1 above we will now examine the tense categories in HCE. We will find that HCE has, in addition to the base form, two absolute tenses, i.e. two tenses that relate the event to the moment of speech, the PAST (E before S) and the FUTure (E after S). The latter is manifested in the forms go(i)n(g)lgonna VB, which should not be confused with ACTion marker go VB. The PAST has a specific form for NEGated PAST, neva. In addition to the regular FUTure form there is bumbye, which gives some indications of REMoteness. A summary of the properties of copula sentences shows that the copula is obligatory in the PAST (was) and FUTure (go(i)n(g)lgonna be), but optional in the PRESent (either zero or some inflected form of be), and that stay denotes LOCative.
4.1
The base form
The base form of the verb refers to anything up to the moment of speech that is not otherwise specifically marked for tense. Since HCE does not need to repeat the temporal marking in a narrative (see 3.1.2 above), the base form will commonly be applied once the context has demonstrated the location of E on a time line. In example (11), where we are informed of where Lenny works, it clearly refers to the present. (11)
Lsnni L biznsz business
wyk fo wan plaent rentol kampeni work for a plant rental company dat go teik kae of that ACT take care of
plaents in plants in
da kain the kind.of
da hotels the hotels.1 (Balaz 1998)
45
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
Tense Categories in HCE
In (12) the speaker is explaining why sharks are now attacking people, which they didn't do before and still don't do where the reef life is unpolluted. While this refers to the present moment, it could also easily be interpreted as a generic. However, a generic connotation is not a specific feature of the base form, as already seen in the example above (it would be fatuous to assume that Lenni working at that specific company is a generic truth - if nothing else, Lenni will not live forever). (12)
...so ra tin d3(s) rein ...so the thing just rain
au[t] out
a(o) ris faekteriz aen hoteoz all these factories and hotels
tura ojen aeh | so ji gsd to the ocean eh so you POSS gofkasaz | so golf.courses so
nau we(a) now where
ao ris kemikoz goir) | ao ris kemikoz goin. in da all these chemicals going all these chemicals going in the wara | so water so
ra tin. kil the thing kill
of da rif laif off the reef life
[about fertilizers polluting the water] ... so the thing just rains out to the ocean, eh. So you have all these factories and hotels, golf courses; so now, where are all these chemicals going? All these chemicals are going in the water, so the stuff kills off the reef life. (MH29Ma)
In example (13) the speaker is showing me how to make a poi stone. Here the meaning can be either E simul S (PRESent), E after S (FUTure), or generic. (13)
...den ...then
idkam tu it come to
jis— tfip you chip
ra saiz wad ji wan den the size REL.PRON you want then
fom from
orea there
it daun laik a jervais... it down like a shave, ice
[showing how to make a poi stone] ... then it comes to the size which you want. Then from there you chip it down like a shave ice (type of ice cream)... (MJ75Mo)
Depending on the meaning you choose for the base form, kam and tfip have to be translated either as SE comes and chip (E simul S or generic), will come and will chip (E after S or generic).The reference point may be placed prior to the present moment, in which case the base form would be translated as PAST in SE. Consider (14) where the speakers refer to a mutual friend who had passed away more than a
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
46 Hawai 7 Creole English
Tense Categories in HCE 47
(14)
A: Ji was she was
gudlukin | good.looking
B: je | aen Ji kaen yeah and she AB
sin sing
A: she was good looking. B: yeah, and she could sing. (A=MF61Mo; B=FH58Mo)
One of the ways the base form is used is to reflect reported speech, in the sense that if the speaker relates a dialogue or a narration told by somebody else, s/he may chose to use the base form and thus transports the utterance to the moment of when it was expressed (see Masuda 2000 for a detailed discussion on HCE discourse). The particular properties of reported speech require further investigation; it is beyond the scope of this study to deal with those issues properly. Observe that the examples below are not related to modality, they refer to factual utterances and are most commonly indicated by either some kind of quotation marker (for example / said — he said or I go — he goes) or through change of pitch. Consider example (15) where the speaker is describing a dialogue with his subordinate. The dialogue starts with hi told me ( L Ai J ) and the subsequent turn taking is indicated by / say ( L Bi J ), change of pitch ( L A 2 J ), and I say ( L B 2 J ). (15)
wan af one of
ma gud fren | wa[n] nai? | ai my good friend one night I
tu wok | hi s— hi tol mi a w— | ma to work he he said me I my wana go horn | en a lug want.to go home and I look a aemblens | teik jo the ambulance take your
waif wife
nid need
al a men all the men
waif i[s] sik a wife is sick I
aed him a sae(s) | ji kol at him I say you call tu ho— tu to to
re dakte | ju the doctor you
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
year previously to the conversation. The copula is obligatorily in the PAST, but can is in the base form. Even without the copula it would have been evident that the speakers were referring to the past, since everybody involved in the conversation knew that the person in question had passed away.
48 Hawai 7 Creole English go horn ju kasnat du natin wid jo waif go home you INAB do nothing with your wife tu to
haendol id handle it
waif wife
| ai nid ju on da I need you on the
d3ab hea | oh no ai goin horn a goin horn a job here oh no I go.lNTRAHF home I go.lNTRAHF home I J LA2 J LB2 sae say
ju go horn ass da laes das ju wok | you go home that's the last day you work J
One of my goodfriends,one night — I needed all the men to work — he said to me "I w— my wife is sick I want to go home." And I looked at him and said "y° u c a ^ the ambulance, take your wife to ho— to the doctor. you go home you won't be able to do anything with your wife, your wife is sick. The doctor to handle it. I need you on the job here." "Oh, no. I'm going home, I'm going home." I said " you go home that's the last day you work ." (MC880)
In (16) the speaker is describing how he listened to his aunt telling him a story of what she had experienced once. Note that the base forms here translate into two different SE tenses, PAST for Ei (listen) and PerFeCT for the reported speech starting with E2 (jump). (16)
...ho a lisn tu INTERJ I listen to dis this
ma aenti laik o kain my Auntie like oh kind
LE, wareva spri? wen d3amp whatever spirit PAST:AD jump
a of
skasri (j)ae scary yeah
| J
intu into
dis wan this one
gai guy
|
L
E2 fal ontu ra graun e(v)riting | dis mis fall onto the ground everything this mist gaiz nek guy's neck tod fo Lord to
eritirj laik | ho Ji d3es everything like INTER she just
was tjoking diz was choking this ore aes(k) da pray ask the
bles h^ ae ... bless her eh J
Ho! I listened to my Auntie, like, oh, kind of scary, yeah. This whatever spirit had jumped into this one guy, he fell onto the ground and everything. This mist was choking this guy's neck, everything like ... Ho, she just prayed, asked the Lord to bless her, eh. (MH29Ma)
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
sik | de dakta sick the doctor
jo your
The base form is less often used for a narration of future events. Consider example (17) where the speaker is reporting what she intends to do. Even though the events have not taken place this is not modal in its substance; there is no indication that the speaker doubts that her intentions will be carried out, or that she is referring to an alternative world. (17)
wel a go— gon teik well I FUT take evri— every aen and
al ma faemli horn | kam wiken all my family home come weekend
evri ara wiken wi gon | klin ap da laen | every other weekend we FUT clean up the land aes a oni that's the only
we way
fo ged COMPLEM get
h^ her
aut out
ji you
no wi klin al ore we Ji stae ba ra ten | know we clean all over.there where she LOC by the tent Ji gon bi Jeim aenti | evribadi kaen she FUT be embarrassed Auntie everybody AB al faensi hauzez all fancy houses
araun around
we Ji stae where she LOC
si h& \ see her
| nais hauzes nice houses
|
Well, I'm going to bring home all my family. When the weekend comes, every— every other weekend we will clean up the land and that's the only way to get her out, you know. We'll clean all there where she is, by the tent. She'll be embarrassed, Auntie, everybody will be able to see her. used to fish for giant clams, you know. Big clams, like, you know, the type movies you might get caught in. (MH64K)
It is clear from (89) to (91) that yustu VB refers to the past, possibly with a remote time reference. Note that even though temporal marking is not obligatory in narratives (see 3.1.2 above), yustu VB tends to appear
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
Aspectual Categories in HCE 95
96
Hawai 7 Creole English
(92)
aen and
a tin. daed laiberi was ahm I think that library was ahm
| put on a— a tirj des put on the I think there's
wan heiau | bifo id was ontap jea | so a heaiu before it was on yeah so tu w^k eitin to work 18
jeas ago ae[d]da laiberi ( mai hea justu years ago at the library my hair PAST:HAB
staen ap | espejl[i] stand up especially rai? | so right so
wen ai fs^s] stared when I first started
if— ai du ra klosap af da biodin if I do the close.up ofthe building
| aim in dea nau | aen evribadiz I'm in there now and everybody's
mai hea iustu staen ap ai my hair PASTrHAB stand up I sambad[i] is falom somebody is following
gon | oh gone oh
iustu fio[l] laik PAST:HAB feel like
mi bihain me behind
(...) and I think that library was, ahm, put on the— I think there was a heiau.30 there, before it [the library] was on it, yeah. So when I first started to work at the library, eighteen years ago, my hair would stand up. Especially if you— I did the close up ofthe building, right? So, I'm in there now, and everybody's gone. Oh, my hair would stand up. I used to feel like somebody was following behind me. (FH61H)
What is important to note about example (92) is that the speaker keeps repeating the PAST:HABitual marker, not because of its tense connotations, since the temporal location ofthe verbs in the narrative have been placed at past already (was), but because of the aspectual nature of yustu VB. Example (93) below shows us how a base form can appear next to the PAST:HABitual construction: it is evident that do refers to the past (the speaker is 79 years old and is talking about his mother's profession), which allows him to ignore temporal marking. However, yustu VB needs to be employed when he specifically refers to the HABitual aspect in the PAST. (93)
ma stepfade aen ma made my step.father and my mother
iustu wok fo | ma mare PAST.HAB work for my mother
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
in the flow of the narrative with its specific PAST:HABitual meaning, as in example (92). This may suggest that it is less optional than, for example, SE used to, i.e. that its aspectual connotations make it necessary to insert it in the narrative even though the past time references have already been established.
Aspectual Categories in HCE 97 du kapente did carpenter
wok work
In all the examples yustu describes events that were characteristic for an extended period of time in the past. The event is viewed from within the relevant limits, but there is no focus on O. We gloss it as PAST:HABitual, since yustu is a portmanteau marker for habituals in the past.
5.4
The completive marker pau
The COMPLetive marker pau is most probably derived from the Hawaiian stative verb 'finished' (Roberts 1998a:24), still in use in Hawaiian (Elbert & Pukui 1979). It marks the completion of an E. Example (94) illustrates a typical occurrence of pau. (94)
When Auntie Sadie pass out da song sheets aftah everybody pau eat dat means pretty soon Firecracker Uncle going come.31 (Lum 1990a:100)
Note that a COMPLetive may combine with habitual situations, since an event may be completed repeatedly. In (95) the speaker describes a typical working day for him. We may thus assume that every time they have finished fixing cars they go down to the wharf for relaxation. (95)
kDs | mi a lav fo fiks ka | tri afta 'cause me I love COMPLEM repair cars gee after
wi pau we COMPL
fiks ka wi go daun a wof | dei gaiz go bai dem repair cars we go down the wharf those guys go buy themselves sam soraz d3amp in some soda jump in watj watch
ra wara mi a go d3rink ma bea the water me I ACT drink my beer
em them
Cause ... me, I love to repair cars. Gee, after we're through repairing the cars we go down to the wharf, the guys go and buy themselves some soda and jump in the water. Me, I drink my beer and watch them. (MH24Mo)
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
My step father and my mother used to work for... my mother did carpenter work. (MC79Mo)
98
Hawai 'i Creole English
(96)
... asn den ji no fo ra—| da wahine jea and then you know for the the woman yeah daed d3es that just hea hair
pau hanau | COMPL give.birth
dei no they NEG
asnti da wan Auntie the one
laik ju waj* jo DESID you wash your
| ja? yeah
(...) and then, you know, for the— the woman, yeah Auntie, who has just finished giving birth; they don't want you to wash your hair, right? (FH50Ma)
It important to observe that pau and wen VB describe two different things, as already discussed in section 5.1. The only reading we have in example (96) is that the event is completed several times. We should not confuse that with ADterminal, which puts the spotlight on the very instant a limit (initial or final) has been reached. Consider the difference in meaning between pau in (96) and wen pau in example (68) from above, which I reproduce here: ba? | ahm | hi but ahm hi
didn du dae? | so didn't do that so
ai figa meibi bikas hi I figure maybe becausehe wen pau PAST:AD COMPL
| a was | ji no ai— I was you know I
haed sambadi PAST:POSS somebody
wo^k on aen de work on and they
meibi hi neva laik maybe he NEGiPAST DESID
hi d3es he just
wer goin so— were going so
|
puli pray
But, ahm, he didn't do that. So I was, you know, I— I figured that maybe that if it can cost the guy a dollar in California, we should pay the dollar here too. And if they can sell gas for dollar, we should buy it for a dollar too. (MP50K)
In (108) the speaker is reassuring the hearer that he will be able to walk by himself later on. (108)
Later on you can walk again by yourself to the dining room. (Lum 1990f:121)
In both of the examples above the speaker refers to general enabling conditions. I will term this ABility. Consider, for instance, example (109), where the speaker points out that the groans she makes when she gets up from a chair would be suitable to make a song of. (109)
awi awi | oh mai gunes meik aokain sorjz aud a ouch ouch oh my goodness make allkind songs out of ten AB
meik son. make song
dae? | eh | that eh
aud a awi awi awi awa | -chair scraping-] out of
autj | ouch Aui, aui. Oh, my goodness, can make all kinds songs out of that, eh? can make songs out of aui—aui—aui—aua. Ouch. (FH77Mo)
In (110) the speaker is explaining that if you leave small parts of your body around (such as nails and hair) evil people will be able to get hold of them and send spells on you. (110) naeoz was if a rimemba rai[d] da neioz waz bikaz | if | sambadi nails was if I remember right the nails was because if somebody
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
d38s proreifd] da staf just pro.rate the stuff
114 Hawai 'i Creole English faun da neioz | aen daets a ps^sono pad of jo found the nails and that's a personal part of your
iuz daed if dei no laik da p^sen | use that if they NEG like the person
tu laig meik ivol agens to like make evil against
ju kahuna you
wi kal we call
kahuna
[When asked why you weren't supposed to cut your nails at night] Nails was ... if I remember correctly ... the nails was because if somebody found the nails and that's a personal part of your body - the can use that if they don't like the person, to, like do evil against you. Kahuna, we call "oh, we got brand new furniture". (FP39H)
Here the obligation was not so much prompted by subjective values, but by external necessity. The priest must know which items are new in the house to be able to do anything about the family's problems. The construction gotta/gaDa VB in (125) expresses the deontic directive meaning, roughly equivalent of SE MUST (Palmer 1986:98ff), imposing an OBLlGation on the agent. Like SE MUST, gotta/gaDa VB somehow involves the speaker. I will therefore term gotta/gaDa VB Associative OBLlGation, by which I mean that the subject associates himself with the obligation he utters. We would not expect to be able to find gotta/gaDa in the PAST, since the speaker can not very well impose obligations on actions already done. In (127) the speaker is reporting what her mother used to say to the boys when they came round for dates. Although the 62-year-old speaker is talking about her teenage years, the obligation {gaDa mceri) is uttered as a quotation of what her mother said. The obligation thus refers to a relative FUTure (i.e. E after R). (127)
aen and
wen haev deits ji haev ma mads when EXIST dates you POSS my mother
aowei[s] saed | ma always said my
mads Ji Ji haev patjagis weis kos | h& hasben mother she she POSS Portuguese ways 'cause her husband au our
fader | ji no was— ju—13 ju kis ma daro^ ji father you know was you you kiss my daughter you
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
120 Hawai 7 Creole English
Modality in HCE 121
Ji she
maeri har daets da patjagi[s] staio| -laughtermarry her that's the Portuguese style
wud aoweis would always
tel dagais— | -laughter- | shid aoweis tel say the guys she'd always say
a gais daed yu kis ma daDr yi gara maeri ho^ | the guys that you kiss my daughter you ASS.OBLIG marry her -chuckles-1 no | -laughter- | Jid sae dae[t] tu no she'd say that to boiz daed kam araun fo faiv af boys that come around for five of sei say
dae[t] tu that to
as us
al al
of of
as | 6e us the
go^-ls | Ji wud aowei[s] girl she would always
dem | them
And when there were dates you had my mother, <who> always said - my mother, she had Portuguese ways 'cause of her husband, our father (see footnote 13), you know, was - " you— you kiss my daughter you've got to marry her", that's the Portuguese style. She would always say the guys. She'd always say the guys that: "if you kiss my daughter you've got to marry her". No? She'd say that to all of us, all of the boys that came around for the five of us girls. She would always say that to them. (FP62H)
In (128) B is explaining to A that she has to punch holes in her lauhala leaf before she dyes it. Here the Associative quality lies in the subjectivity which is a matter of taste: it is possible to dye a lauhala leaf without punching holes in it first, but the result will be different from dyeing a punched lauhala. (128)
A: ai si ai I see I
si aenti ah Xs wan— see Auntie ah Xs one
I've seen, I've seen Auntie Xs one— B: ji no watju you know what.you
gara— ju no nau fo ASS.OBLIG you know how to
ji gara | pantj um aen den you ASS.OBLIG punch it and then
du om ah do it ah
dai um | dye it
You know what you've got to— you know how to do it, eh? You've got to punch and then dye it. A: jeah | Yeah Yeah.
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
gara ASS.OBLIG
122
Hawai 7 Creole English
B: gara pantj um f^s— ASS.OBLIG punch it first .
(A=FH58Mo; B=FH77Mo) In contrast to gaDa, DlSASSociative OBLlGation may be inflected in the past tense, for the simple reason that the external factors that prompt the obligation can be referred to at a later stage, i.e. can be referred to with past time reference. As expected we do find have to VB in the PAST {had to VB) as, for instance, in example (131), where the narrator describes what his teacher made them do every year (cf. also example (126) above). (131)
J'like da pumpkin we had to make out of da paper bag.] 5 (Lum 1990e:59)
In (132) the narrator feels compelled by Erwin's ignorance (a factor beyond her control) to provide an embarrassing explanation. (132)
I was so humiliated, and even more humiliated when I had to explain to Erwin what one bastard was.16 (Linmark 1995b:74)
We may therefore conclude that the difference between the two types of OBLlGation, have to and gaDa, lies in a different amount of association from the part ofthe subject. 6.4.1 should VERB The construction should/shud VB is not uncommon and is, like gotta/gaDa an associative directive. However, it is not an OBLlGation, but rather a subjective CONDitional, in that the speaker allows the possibility that the event, that (according to the speaker) should take place, might in fact not come about. Consider for instance example (133).
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
B: daed wan that one
124 Hawai 7 Creole English Ah Po say you should braid your hair into a queue like the old Chinese plantation workers.17 (Lum 1980b:48)
In (134) the speaker indicates that, according to him, he and his brother-in-law should fish where they live. It might be that his brotherin-law will go somewhere else and fish; the speaker is merely stating his opinion of how it ought to be. (134)
das we wi kam from das we wi Cud frj that's where we come from that's where we COND fish That's where we come from, that's where we should fish. (MH29Ma)
We see here that the construction refers to "what would occur or would have occurred" (Palmer 2001:74) if the agents had fulfilled the obligation. Note, however, that it is the speaker's attitude that is reflected, which is what makes the expression subjective. The construction may be used for PAST events; the speaker announces what should have been, even though it wasn't fulfilled, as in (135). (135)
Maybe I should have told him I seen Benjamen by his bug place las time.18 (Lum 1990b: 14)
Likewise in (136) the narrator reflects on what she should have done, but (alas) didn't do. (136)
I kinda stay thinking maybe I should have wore my yarn wig, too.19 (Yamanaka 1993:84)
6.4.2 ought to VERB There are three examples in my written database, and none in my spoken, of ought to VB, all from the same author: (137)
Maybe you ought to give this to the kitchen.20 (Luml990f:118)
(138)
You oughta try one piece.2' (Lum 1980b:58)
(139)
Dey oughta replace all you guys with a bunch of birds.22 (Lum 1980b:53)
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
(133)
Modality in HCE 125
6.5
better VERB
The construction better/beDa VB is consistently used in a context of warning, where the speaker has an undertone of "or else", similar to the SE construction had better VB. In example (140) the speaker is warning me to keep my eyes on the sea while picking opihi (a type of shell on ocean rocks) and that I better hurry up away from the wave when I can see the swell building up, or else I might get killed. (140)
oni da bes wei ju tun laig dis | ji pik only the best way you turn like this you pick
opihi ju watj| opihi you watch
wen da sweo kam ap wsn daet sweo kam ap | when the swell come up when that swell come up rimemba ju beda gfol ove remember you ADMON go over
dea | daet sweo gointjripju there that swell FUT trip you
Only, the best way you turn like this, you pick opihi, you watch. When the swell comes up, when that swell comes up, remember, you better go over there that swell will knock you down. (FH95H)
In (141) we find the same element of "or else" in the warning: (141)
So you guys betta do everyting dey tell you guys.23 (Matt. 23:3)
We will regard this as a deontic directive and term it ADMONitive in accordance with the definition in Bybee et al. that "the speaker is issuing a warning" (1994:179). In example (142) the informant considers my suggestion that try VB may be a form of politeness and pictures what would have happened if she had not obeyed her parents when they said try go get... to the children. (142)
a I
min wen au paerent[s] mean when our parents
sa? said
tjrai POL.REQ
go ACT
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
ged get
ju you
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
The construction is does not seem to be common and is probably best interpreted as a lexical alternative to should VB. Since all instances come from the same author, it seems reasonable to assume that this is simply a stylistic variation of should VB.
126
Hawai 7 Creole English bera
go
ged
ADMON ACT get
id | -laughsit
I mean, when our parents said "try go get" you had better go get it!
Note that the addressee ofthe warning may be the speaker him/herself, as in (143) where the speaker describes a nightly and not too pleasant excursion. When she sees something strange on the side ofthe road she doesn't stop to investigate, but then thinks better of it and turns around. She tells herself that she had better check what that is, in case somebody is in trouble. (143)
was was
reli dark| kol | ae[n] really dark cold and
no no
jtjri?laits | aen wen ai street.lights and when I
kamin daun | aen ai coming down and I
luk | aen de look and there
blu blue
on on
| tinz laig raid things like right
aen ai and I aen and
sae? oh said oh ai | ai kep I I kept
de[a] ai there I tjrab[o] o trouble or
is daed aen ai is that and I
goin | aen den going and then ai I
laig diz | tu ahm like these two ah
a said a da rod | tu dats | the side ofthe road two dots
mai gad wad my God what
saed | wei? said wait
waz was
was was
d3es just
wen ai when I
kain kind
a glaens of glance
wen ge[d] PAST.-AD get
daun down
bera Urn araun | meibi sambadfi] ADMON turn around maybe somebody
samtin kaz wai something 'cause why
wu[d] daed bi would that be
in in
laig dae? | like that
was really dark, cold, and no streetlights. And when I was coming down and I looked - and there was like these two, ah, blue things, like right on the side ofthe road. Two dots. And I said "Oh my God, what is that", and I just, kind of, glanced, and I— I kept going. And then, when I got down there [the destination], I said "Wait, I had better turn around. Maybe somebody in trouble or something, 'cause why would it be like that." (FP39H)
In (144) the speaker tells herself that she should probably remove her things from the table (or else the cookies she is organizing will soil them). (144)
wi ao we all
tjipt in aen | ga? kukiz | -crackling-1 hmm chipped in and got cookies
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
| aibsda I ADMON
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
(FP62H)
Modality in HCE 127 |
[announcing as she opens a bunch of cookie cartons] We all chipped in and got cookies. Hm, I should probably move my stuff... [or else her things might get soiled] (FH77Mo)
In example (144) I translated beDa as SE "should probably" in order to show that even though beDa should presumably be seen as deriving from SE had better VB, it does not necessarily have to the exact equivalent of it in contemporary HCE. In the following written examples the element of threat or warning is not particularly strong - although the undertone of "or else" is still there - and better/beDa could well be translated into SE "should probably". (145)
I guess I betta tell you.24 (Sakamoto 1988:21)
In (146) somebody is reflecting that it would be unwise to let "the other guys" know who he is. (146)
He tell dem dey betta not tell da odda guys who him.25 (Matt. 12:16)
The fact that better/beDa can be translated into two separate forms in SE merely indicates that SE has a distinct form for the weaker nuance and HCE does not.
6.6
must and might
The constructions must VB and might VB are not particularly common, though by no means scarce in the database. Although the two forms convey similar notions of epistemic judgement, might VB is more speculative in its nature than must VB, much like the SE equivalents MAY26 and MUST respectively (see Palmer 2001). Consider (147), where the speaker is deducing that the reason her relative was so light coloured was that some white person had got mixed in with the family. (147)
mas bi mai— mai DEDUCT.JUD be my my wen PAST:AD
luk look
ah—sambadi wi[d] da wait blad | ah somebody with the white blood
mo laik on a | more like on the
wait sai | wi[d] da kain white side with the kind
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
skaedy mai staf move my stuff
128 Hawai 7 Creole English ah blon ah blond
hea hair
|
Must have been my— my— ah, somebody with the white blood. looked more, like, on the white side, with the, ah blond hair.
In example (148) the narrator describes how he and his friends were carefree until they realized that there probably were toads in the grass. Their reasoning is based on reality and the world as they know it. (148)
(...) and we was hiding and laughing until I went tink of da toads dat must stay inside da grass (...)27 (Lum 1990e: 65)
In (149) the speaker deduces that the haole he is referring to (who lives in the US West coast) probably watches in the morning what the speaker is now seeing on TV, given the time difference between Hawai'i and the mainland. (149)
This what the haole must watch in the morning before he go school. That's what I think.28 (Yamanaka 1999:288)
Observe that we are not dealing with any kind of obligation here, as is also made clear by the added "That's what I think". The above examples have shown that must is used when a speaker is expressing a qualified opinion based on known facts of the real world, when they utter a DEDUCTive JUDgement. By contrast, might is less certain in its tone. It is used when the speaker speculates on possibilities, as in (150). Here the speaker speculates on the tradition that says that you should not wash your hair just after having given birth to a child. She tries to explain why the listener was told not to wash her hair with anything else than dry shampoo for a month after child birth. (150)
d3es fom just from
duin daed | ju—ju don waj* jo doing that you you don't wash your
maid fal af SPECUL.JUD fall of
hea | kaz id hair 'cause it
| aen ahm | daes wad wi lo^n | wi lo^n and ahm that's what we learn we learn
in a kantjri | wi lo^n al a in the country we learn all of
um it
Just from doing that - you— you don't wash your hair, 'cause it might fall of. And, ahm, that's what we learned— what we learned in the country. We learned all of it. (FH71Ma)
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
(FH61H)
Modality in HCE 129
(151)
And no follow us if he like go cruising 'cause somethiq might happen in the car.29 (Yamanaka 1993:42)
Again, in (152), we are told that "something might happen" as far as the speaker knows. It is not a certainty that something will happen if we swear at a certain place, but there is a risk for it given that spirits don't like human swearing and given that they tend to hang around the particular place the speaker is talking about. (152)
ah seikred ah Sacred
fals don't swer aed seikred Fallsdon't swear at Sacred
don swer in don't swear in
der | -VV: waithere
maid
haepen
SPECUL.JUD
happen
fals daeds in Fall that's in
oahu | O'ahu
| bikaz | samtin because something
|
Ah ... Sacred Falls. Don't swear at Sacred Falls, that's in O'ahu. Don't swear in there. -VV: why? -Because something might happen. (MH22H)
In example (150) through (153) the speaker is less committed than with must, and only offers a speculation as to the truth ofthe statement. Again following Palmer (2001) we shall term this SPECULative JUDgement. Since these notions are highly subjective, we do not expect them to have past tenses: the subject is in a simul S situation and can only offer judgements in the present time.30 Consider example (153) below, where the speaker is describing how the older generation had urged her generation to believe the legends. The time reference is clearly past tense, but when she remembers that a person she knows might have a book about the legends we had been talking about the tense shifts to present. The speculation obviously refers to the present world; the speaker is wondering whether I will be able to get hold of even more information than what she has been able to give me. (153)
...so dei justu aoweiz so they PAST:HAB always
tel as ji no samtaimz ju gaiz tell us you know sometimes you guys
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
In (151) somebody is told not to follow the speaker if her companion wants to go cruising. "Something might happen" is the reason given. The speaker does not know what the intentions of the companion are, but she has certain hopes and speculates on the possibility of them coming true.
Hawai 7 Creole English
tig daets na[tj] tjru o think that's not true or
is d3es is just
wan led3en | ji gaiz gara a legend you guys ASS.OBLIG
beliv bikaz | ji no da kam believe because you know the kind.of
sprit[s] spirits
stil exist jea | still exist yeah
pleni stio jet led3en in faek | aenti X maid haev riten aenti Xz plenty still legend in fact Auntie X SPECUL.JUD have written Auntie X's wan a one of
mai my
dae? aeria that area
kupuna | Ji wen raid wan buk tu abau? Kupunas she PAST:AD write a book too about
we Ji liv where she lives
(...) So they always used to tell us, "You know, sometimes you guys think that's not true or it's just a legend. You guys have got to believe , because you know, those spirits still exist, yeah." -VV: yeah. -There are still plenty of legends. In fact Auntie X might have written - Auntie X's one of my seniors - she wrote a book about the area where she lives. (FH51H)
By contrast, in (154), must is used when the informant is using his knowledge of unpolluted Pacific islands and their reef life to ponder about how Hawai'i probably used to be. (154)
aen and
ho wa— | wen ju g[o] oh wo(w)... when you go
-VV:jeahhawai Hawai'i
| a min ji— I mean you
mas haev DEDUCT.JUD have
ovasi dae[s] so overseas there's so
matj fij] much fish
| aen wen ju tin. we and when you think well bin been
wa[h] wow
laig dis bifo like this before
And oh, wow— when you go overseas, there's so much fish! - W : yeah. -I mean— and when you think— well wow, Hawai'i must have been like this before. (MH64K)
In (155) we can follow the reasoning of A and B when they try to arrive at the correct date when a member of the extended family passed away. When they arrive at a qualified guess, a DEDUCTive JUDgement, based on known facts, they use must. (155)
A: je a tin a wen kaun ei[d] deiz | aefta | o yeah I think I PAST:AD count eight days after or bifo | a tirj ei[d] deiz before I think eight days
aefta— after
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
ei[d]deiz eightdays
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
130
Modality in HCE 131 Yeah, I think I counted eight days after. Or eight days before. I think eight days after— B: was kapol was couple
a of
deiz days
aefta after
ho* bo^dei— her birthday
A: wad— wad what what
waz h& bo^dei | da dei of was her birthday the day of
ho^ bo^t her birth
|
What— what was her birthday. The day of her birth. B: mas haev DEDUCTJUD have
bin— been
Must have been— A: da tOMtin | the thirteenth The thirteenth? B: Ji daido— | Ji daid she died ah she died
sametaim do— summertime though
She died ... ah— she died during the summer though— A: noo-o | no No-o! B: matj March
a tin. matj— I think March
March, I think March— A: id waz matj | it was March It was March. (A=MP50K; B=MP85K)
The highlighted forms of the above examples are, as expected, not judgements in the past, but judgements in the simul S (i.e. at the moment of speech) of past events.
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
was couple of days after her birthday—
132 Hawai 7 Creole English
like (VERB)
Throughout the material, both written and spoken, like VB is the common DESlDerative marker, denoting "internal volitional conditions in the agent with respect to the predicate action" (Bybee et al. 1994:178). In example (156) the speaker says that she thinks she wants to go and SQQpapa. (156) ji you
no ai know I
tin a laig go si papa think I DESID ACT see papa
wen hi kamz | when he comes
You know, I think I want to go and see papa when he comes. (FH50Ma)
In (157) we are told that the narrator wants to jump out of his bed (when he sees that two aliens are in his room). In this case a certain inability to do what is wished is conveyed: why not simply jump out of the bed instead of lying there and wishing for it? The overall context tells us that he is paralyzed by the fact that a couple of aliens are in his room. (157)
I like jump outa bed ...31 (Oribio 1999a:l)
In example (158) we have a NEGated DESlDerative. (158)
My fahdah stay so tight, so pa-ke. He no like buy firecracker, man.32 (Lum 1990a:99)
The speaker in (159) is describing how a person intended to make trouble and how the speaker prevented it by proving that he was stronger. (159)
ash da gai laig meig hambag so eh the guy DESID make trouble so
| a wen lik da gai eh I PAST:AD hit the guy eh
Eh, the guy wanted to make trouble, so I hit him, eh. (MH29Ma)
6.8
Summary
In this chapter we have seen that HCE has a fairly complex modal system. We have seen that there are two separate forms for expressing a request, the IMPERative and try VB, the latter being a politer form than
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
6.7
133
a direct command. Such a device is not unheard of cross-linguistically (cf. Palmer 2001 for some examples). HCE has a variety of deontic markers with specialized functions. The DlSASSociative have to (which may be inflected in the PAST to had to) denotes OBLlGation with which the subject is not directly associated, such as in when the lauhala is hard it has to soak in water. With the Associative gotta (gaDa), on the other hand, the subject is somehow connected with the OBLlGation, such as in, for example, you gotta play hard to get. A related Associative directive is should VB, which denotes a subjective CONDitional, where the subject expresses what should or ought to take place (according to him/her), but might not happen, such as in you should braid your hair properly. The construction ought to appears to serve as a stylistic variant for this with one of the written source authors. HCE also has the ADMONitive beDa, which allows the speaker to issue a warning. Furthermore we have two negative modals, cannot and no can. In the written material they are in free variation, each apparently denoting both the dynamic INABility and the deontic directive PROHlBition. In the spoken material, on the other hand, the two forms seem to represent one function each: cannot is limited to denoting INABility and no can is limited to indicating PROHlBition. Both of these forms may contrast with the single positive can, which conveys either an ABility or a PERMission meaning, in spoken as well as written language. In addition to the deontic and dynamic markers, there are two types of epistemic JUDgements in HCE, the SPECULative might and the DEDUCTive must. The latter lets the speaker express a qualified opinion based on evidence available in the real world. In contrast, might allows the speaker to express a less certain conjecture of what could possibly, but does not necessarily have to, happen. Finally, HCE has the DESlDerative marker like, well attested in the whole database, for all registers, areas, ethnic groups and ages, and for both males and females.
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
Modality in HCE
134
Hawai 7 Creole English
1
2
3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11
12
13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
Free translation: D: Auntie Esther, could you please ask Ah Po for me... C'mon Aunty. Don't tell me that she doesn't talk about anything with you. // (...) // AP: Ah Jiu, where's Ah Jiu? // E: Ricky, come here. Ah Po wants to talk to you. Free translation: J: Look this flag has fifty stars. // B: Are you sure? // J: Yeah, count them. //(...)// M: You see what I mean. What the hell did you hit me for? And clear up the way you talk, eh, you sound like a guy. // J: Yeah? Do I look like a guy too? Free translation: Na-na-nasubi was kind of sissy so you could scare him kind of easily. Free translation: "Go get me his bottle from the fridge. Yeah - you can feed him, this bottle, the next bottle, every time if you like - but only 'cause I trust you." Free translation: May I call you Vinny? Free translation: May I ask how much? The sixth being the session described above (see 2.2) where the informant disassociated himself from anything he felt was too SE like. He rejected cannot as too "proper", even though he himself used cannot (during that very session) in an INABility context. Free translation: "He can't come with us if he's going to be a sissy". Free translation: Then he treated me to a shave ice from the truck but I couldn't even take one bite. Free translation: So you can't (you're not allowed to) hit back, you've got to pass it on. Free translation: "You know what I mean, how they cry like that, eh, Lovey? Me, I can't stand it when they're suffering like that. Like your Nanny. Their faces burning like that, their tongues hanging out. All the babies burning and melting away." Free translation: Do you think the girls are going to laugh if they find out that I can't (= am unable to) dance? // (...) // The guy can't (is unable to) cook. // (...) // They can't (aren't allowed to) look as good as you. // (...) // Can't I (= am I not allowed to) have some fun or what? The speaker interrupts herself but from what had previously been discussed it is clear that she is alluding to the fact that her father was Portuguese and that her mother had adopted his ways. Free translation: "(...) If you're good you may join. You've got to take care of your uniform and do all your homework, though." Free translation: Just like the pumpkin we had to make out ofthe paper bag. Free translation: I was so humiliated, and even more humiliated when I had to explain to Erwin what a bastard was. Free translation: Ah Po says you should braid your hair into a queue like the old Chinese plantation workers. Free translation: Maybe I should have told him that I had seen Benjamin by his bug place last time. Free translation: I was kind of thinking maybe //1 should have worn my yarn wig, too. Free translation: Maybe you ought to give this to the kitchen. Free translation: You should try one piece. Free translation: They ought to replace all you guys with a bunch of birds. Free translation: So you had better do everything they tell you. Free translation: I guess I'd better tell you. Free translation: He told them that they probably shouldn't tell the other guys who he is. The exceptionally few occurrences of may VB in my database all point to "haolified" talk: they all occur in written data and are all found in contexts where the narrator indicates how somebody is trying to "talk proper" (i.e. speak SE or at least SE-like).
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
Notes
27 28 29 30 31 32
135
Therefore I am not including them in the discussion. A typical example is "you may wear this snake around your neck." (Yamanaka 1996:187). This is said by an elegant girl who knew how to talk and behave. Free translation: (...) and we were hiding and laughing until I thought about the toads that had to be in the grass (...) Free translation: This is what that haole must watch in the morning before he goes to school. That's what I think. Free translation: And don't follow us if he want's to go cruising // 'cause something might happen in the car. The HCE form might should not be seen as a MAY in the past tense (cf. note 26 above). Free translation: I wanted to jump out of bed. Free translation: My father is so tight, so mean. He doesn't want to buy firecrackers, man.
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
Modality in HCE
7
The aim of this study was to provide an in depth analysis of the TMA system in HCE. This section will give a summary ofthe findings as well as place HCE in a global perspective and return to the issues raised in Chapter 1.1 will leave it to further research to comprehensively discuss what light the results of this study may throw on the genesis of HCE. As we shall see, the TMA system of HCE is not crosslinguistically unique or even unusual and we may ask ourselves whether or not that is a surprising finding. If Creoles do not form a structural type of language, then it is not surprising to find that the HCE TMA categories are well represented in the languages ofthe world. As was discussed in Chapter 1, HCE was the main trigger for the LBH (Bickerton 1980[1974]). This study shows that the TMA system of contemporary HCE does not conform to the LBH predictions. It could be argued that the reason for that is decreolization (Sato 1993), i.e. that HCE is gradually merging with its lexifier. That would suggest a drift towards the SE system, with which HCE is in constant contact. However, that is contradicted by the fact that the HCE TMA system differs from the SE system too, in spite of a century's coexistence of the two varieties and the stigmatized status of HCE (see Chapter 1 above). As this study is strictly synchronic it therefore does not allow for a proper discussion of such issues as decreolization, since that would also require analyzing diachronic data. However, it seems unlikely to me that the TMA system of HCE shows any evidence of decreolization, as I will discuss further in the following sections. My basic argument is that if HCE were becoming decreolized we would expect its various grammatical categories to correspond more and more closely to the SE ones, but there are at least two possible instances of ongoing grammaticalization which moves the TMA system of HCE away from that ofthe SE one: bumbye as REMOTE.FUTURE and hadVB 136
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
The Basic TMA System in HCE
137
as a POSTterminal. This ongoing grammaticalization (if that is indeed what it is), together with the various TMA categories that HCE does not share with SE (see section 7.2.1) seems to exhibit a development independent of SE, despite a century of intensive contact.1 The present study thus brings together a multitude of issues. We have here a language that emerged recently through a certain sociopolitical situation, which does not have the predicted creole prototype system, nor is converging towards the lexifier system, nor differs all that much from other non-creole languages in the world. The findings of this study will in this way serve as a contribution to the discussion of whether Creoles form their own structural type of language. Another issue that the present study of HCE addresses in general is how a Low (L) variety language may well continue to exist and follow its own paths of grammaticalization despite external efforts to undermine its use. We have seen in previous sections that HCE does not enjoy a high status in society. As such, this survey offers a case in point in the discussion ofthe adequacy of L variety languages (cf. Ryan 1979). Seeing that we are focussing exclusively on contemporary HCE, there has been no means for tracing the paths of grammaticalization for the various features discussed. However, in presenting an in-depth analysis ofthe present state of affairs, the study provides a synchronic basis for diachronic analyses of the internal development and grammaticalization processes in HCE. I also suggest that further research examine possible substrate or areal features in the data presented here. Furthermore, it would doubtless be worthwhile to look closer at the topic of variation in HCE. We have seen that there is a degree of geographical variation between the islands, as well as variation across register. Future studies might find it useful to examine possible variation patterns relating to gender, age and ethnicity. The purpose of this study was precisely to provide in depth material for such investigations.
7.1
Summary of the HCE TMA system
In the following I will give a brief overview of the tense, aspect and modality categories of HCE. The findings are summarized in 7.1: the features ofthe HCE TMA system are listed together with their respective formal realisations.
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
The Basic TMA System in HCE
Hawai 7 Creole English
FEATURE
CONSTRUCTION
CROSSLINGUISTIC STATUS
COMMENT
ErelR
base form
common
the base form is used when the temporal setting is known
PRES PAST FUT REM.FUT
common inflected common go(i)n(g)lgonna VB common bumbye uncommon -S
PASTIAD
INTRA
INTRALF INTRAHF INTRA™™
POST PASTIHAB COMPL IMPER POL.REQ OBLIG
DISASS.OBLIG ASS.OBLIG
(ASS)COND ADMON PERM AB INAB PROHIB JUD DESID
DEDUCT.JUD SPECUL.JUD
wenVB
uncommon
stay VB VB-ing stay VB-ing hadVB yustu VB pau base form tryVB have to VB gotta/gaDa VB should VB betterIbeDa VB canVB canVB cannot VB no can VB must VB might VB like VB
common common uncommon common uncommon common common uncommon common common ? ? common common common ? common common common
note that having a PFV/IPFV distinction is common
7.1 The TMA features of HCE in a cross-linguistic perspective
The overwhelming majority ofthe TMA categories in contemporary HCE are common tense, modality or aspect categories in the languages of the world. The following will place each marker in a global perspective, to the extent that crosslinguistic data is available for that category. The crosslinguistic status given for each feature is based on data available in van der Auwera & Amman {forthc. a, b), Brown & Levinson (1987), Bybee et al. (1994), Comrie (1985), Dahl & Velupillai (forthc. a, b, c, d), Dahl (1985), Johanson (2000), and Palmer (2001). I have given a "?" for
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
138
The Basic TMA System in HCE
139
7.1.1 Tense Tense locates an event (E) at a specific point in time in relation to a certain reference point. It may be either absolute, in which case the E is relative to the moment of speech (E relative S) or relative, in which case the E is relative to a reference point (E relative RV These distinctions may be further specified as to the relative distance from the S or R, and indicate the remoteness inherent in the tense category. As with many languages ofthe world, HCE does not need to repeat a temporal marking throughout a narrative. Instead the base form may be used once the event has been located on the time line. See Chapter 3 ( The Framework of this Study) for an in-depth discussion of the framework I use to analyse my data, and Chapter 4 ( Tense Categories in HCE) for details on the findings. The base form The base form may refer to anything up to the moment of speech and is the common form once the context has demonstrated the temporal location of E. We find that the base form is used less often for FUTure, since it generally, but not exclusively, refers to anything up to the moment of speech. It may also reflect reported speech, in which case the utterance quoted is Actively transported to the moment of when it was expressed. A large number ofthe languages ofthe world use the unmarked verb forms in narratives (Comrie 1985:102ff). In fact, as Dahl (1985:113) points out it is more common not to repeat the tense marking in narrative contexts than to keep repeating them once the temporal location on the time line has been specified. HCE thus conforms to the common cross-linguistic pattern. The -sform In addition to the base form, HCE has an -s form occasionally used for the present tense. The existence of this form for the present tense could conceivably lead to the assumption that it is used specifically to denote an E simul S meaning. The data does not, however, show that the -s form is obligatory for E simul S, which may also be expressed by the base form, especially after the temporal setting has been specified (see above). Other (non-obligatory) uses for the form include generics, and
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
features where cross-linguistic data was not available to me. The characteristics of each feature are further summarized below.
140
Hawai 7 Creole English
The PAST tense The grammatical way of locating E prior to S is regularly marked by inflecting the verb, as in [hi keim horn (jestadae)] 'He came home (yesterday)' or [it haepend (jestadae)] 'It happened (yesterday)'. Merely inflecting the verb thus transports the event to a location prior to the moment of speech on the time line. There are no aspectual connotations involved, as would have been the case if wen VB had been used instead ofthe inflected form. The common way to express NEGated PAST is to use the construction neva VB, as in [hi neva kam horn (jestadae)] 'He didn't come home (yesterday)'. The majority (142 of 223 or ca 64 per cent) of our WALS map languages mark PAST tense grammatically (Dahl & Velupillai forthc.b; cf. also Dahl 1985:155ff). Of those, 100 languages do not have grammatical marking for remoteness. This means that HCE conforms to the majority ofthe languages in our sample. The FUTure tense
The general difficulty with analyzing FUTure (E after S) tense is that it tends to have some modal connotations, since the event hasn't taken place yet. However, the constructions go(i)n(g)/gonna VB are used only for clear predictions, as in [da san goi stio jet gona raiz tumaro] 'The sun will rise tomorrow anyway'. The predictions are based on the present state of the world and can be tested later. In other words, there is no subjectivity to the truth of the facts, which means that go(i)n(g)/gonna VB only carry information as to the temporal location ofthe event, and do not specify any kind of modality. The FUTure is a well-represented category in Dahl's 1985 database (cf. also Table 7.1 in Bybee et al. 1994:252f). Half (112 of 223) of our WALS map languages mark future other than through inflection (Dahl & Velupillai forthc.d). HCE thus conforms to a common cross-linguistic pattern with respect to its future tense. bumbye It might be that bumbye, which is predominantly found on Kaua'i and Hawai'i, is in an early or initial stage of grammaticalizing into a REMote FUTure.2 It is not interchangeable with go(i)n(g)/gonna, and is
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
historical present readings, though, again, the use of the form is not limited to either of those meanings.
141
limited to expressions referring to events at a certain distance away in time. It is revealing that, while go(i)n(g)/gonna can combine with time expressions like, for example, 'in a while', 'tomorrow', 'next year' or 'when I retire', bumbye can only combine with the latter two. All informants immediately rejected a sentence like [*bambai tumaro ai gon pik opihi], whereas [bambai neks jea ai gon pik opihi] was accepted. It remains to be seen whether bumbye will grammaticalize into a tense marker. Although REMote distinctions are fairly common in the languages of the world (cf. Dahl 1985:121f and Dahl & Velupillai/ort/jc.b) it seems much more common to have grammatical REMote distinctions in PAST than in FUTure; Bybee et al. (1994:247), for example, have only one instance of REMOTE.FUTURE in their database, in contrast to a number of REMoterPAST. HCE thus conforms to the common cross-linguistic pattern in that it has a REMoteness marker, but falls in the class of typologically rare languages in that it is the FUTure and not the PAST that has this distinction. goVB A discussion on go VB is warranted simply because it has often been assumed to be a FUTure marker (cf. for instance Bickerton 1977, Roberts 1998a). However, the data show that it rather marks ACTion or intended action (such as [go s^f] or [go rait 9m daun] 'write it down'), without reference to time (but see Sato 1985 on the possibility of it being a MOTion marker). It is often used when a speaker wishes to induce action, as in [go tjek ova dea] '(I suggest that you) go and check over there'. However, it is not confined to any particular modality, as, for instance, imperative (hence the translation '(I suggest ...)'). The construction go VB can combine with any temporal reference, for example the FUTure: [ai gonj go tjek 9m aut fo ju] 'I'll check it out for you'. Also, it is often used in narratives clearly placed in the past when the speaker refers to actions that took place before the moment of speech. Moreover, it can also combine with different types of aspect, and frequently occurs with PAST:ADterminal wen VB or PAST:HABitual yustu VB. 7.1.2 Aspect I have used the general terminology and definitions presented in Johanson (2000), for which I have given a summary in section 3.2. The framework consists of the perspective taken on an E - through the so
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
The Basic TMA System in HCE
Hawai 7 Creole English
called viewpoint operators. If we imagine an E as having a starting point {initium), an ending point (finis) and an intermediate course {cursus), the viewpoint operators will set the perspective in relation to the relevant limits of the E. They then will either view an E within the relevant limits (INTRAterminal); or they will view the E after the transgression of one ofthe limits (POSTterminal); or they may view the E at the very attainment of one ofthe limits (ADterminal). In the first case we have an internal perspective on the E, viewing it while it is under way, i.e. during the course or part ofthe course ofthe event. Note that an INTRAterminal in itself is not implying that the E necessarily must have a long duration, since even an event of comparatively short duration can be viewed from within, during the progression of it. In other words, although the duration of He was studying for several years is longer than He was reading for a couple of hours, the perspective taken on the respective events are the same, namely viewing them from within. Likewise an event of a comparatively short duration, as While he was falling from the ladder his life passed in review, can also be viewed from within the relevant limits. The second type of viewpoint operator in our framework, POSTterminal, views the E after the transgression of one ofthe relevant limits. The perspective may be taken either with respect to the initium, the starting point, or the finis, the end point. In the first instance we may have an event such as It had started to rain when I came home, where the perspective is set after the transgression ofthe starting point of the event "raining". The equivalent perspective on the finis would, for instance, be, It had stopped raining when I came home. In both cases the crucial information is that the viewpoint is set after the transgression of one of the endpoints of the event. We are thus placing the perspective after the event had started or after the event had finished. It is at this point important to note that the aspectual POSTterminal is not synonymous with tense, although SE has portmanteau markers placing POSTterminal in various temporal strata, such as have + past participle for PerFeCT (/ have written) and had + past participle for PLuPerFeCT (/ had written). In other words, POSTterminal does not per se give any information on the temporal location of an event, only the perspective taken on it - unless, of course, there are specific portmanteau markers adding information on the tense. The third viewpoint operator in ourframework,ADterminal, views the event at the very attainment of its relevant limit. That means that the perspective is set at either the starting point or end point of the event. In
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
142
143
other words, we view the E just as we reach one of the limits, either the initium or thefinis.Observe that just because one ofthe limits ofthe E has been reached, it does not follow that the whole action itself is completed; we may have the viewpoint on the starting point of an event, leaving us without information as to the possible completion of an event. It should also be noted that ADterminal is not equivalent to RESULTative, in that the information given by the viewpoint operator is only that we are viewing the E at the reaching point of one of the crucial limits, irrespective of whether that will lead to a result that holds at the moment of speech or not. We may, for instance, want to put the perspective on the attainment ofthe starting point of an event, thereby leaving it open what the results of the action might be. Conversely, we may choose to put the perspective on the end point of an E, without giving further information about possible results of the action. Finally it should be mentioned that ADterminal is not necessarily confined to events of very short duration; an E of long duration may, just as an E of short duration, be viewed at the attainment of either the starting point or end point of it. Thus It fell and It burned are events of different duration, but we may choose to place the perspective on the initium or on the finis on either of them. In other words, ADterminal does not give information on the overall duration ofthe E, it merely tells us that one ofthe relevant limits has been reached. Aspect should not be confused with actionality, which is only concerned with the internal structure of an E. Viewpoint operators tell us which perspective is taken on an E, whereas actionality gives us information on the internal properties of an E. In other words, aspect does not concern itself with the inherent properties of an action, it simply deals with the perspective taken on it. Although there are certain restrictions as to which types of actionalities can combine with which viewpoint operators, the viewpoint operators do not in themselves give us any specifications as to what kind of internal structure an action has. Actionality, on the other hand, indicates whether or not the E is transformative [±t], i.e. has a natural turning point. For instance, the difference between congeal and dwell is that the former has a natural course leading up to a turning point (when the item is congealed) and is thus transformative, whereas dwell is ^transformative in that it is a constant; there is no inherent turning point in the event. In both cases, however, we are dealing with inherent properties of the action, and not the perspective taken on it. Therefore, although viewpoint operators may interact with temporality or actionality, they do not have any of those features inherently.
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
The Basic TMA System in HCE
Hawai 7 Creole English
wen VB is a PAST ADterminal The construction wen VB, a portmanteau marker for PAST:ADterminal, envisages the attainment of a relevant limit of an E located in the past. As already mentioned above, ADterminalis is not tantamount to COMPLetive, since it only gives us the information that the crucial limit of an E has been reached, but not necessarily that an action has been completed. Nor is it, as previously discussed, synonymous with RESULTative, since the circumstance in which an ADterminal may occur could either lead to a result that will hold at the moment of speech or not. Again, the only information an ADterminal gives us is that a crucial limit of an E has been arrived at. This is obviously equally true for an ADterminal in the PAST, which merely places the localization point (LP) to the left ofthe deictic centre, O, on a time line. The viewpoint A is placed at the LP, with which the crucial limit ® coincides. In other words, the fact that the location on the time line of the whole event stands in relation to the deictic centre (whether that is the moment of speech or some reference point) does not alter the perspective on E. Thus, a sentence like [hi wen du 9m] 'He did it' is, primarily concerned with aspect even though the E is placed prior to the moment of speech. On the other hand, the sentence [hi did am] 'He did it' has no aspectual connotations at all, but merely gives us temporal information (i.e. that it occurred in the past). It should be noted that the two sentences [hi wen du 9m] and [hi did om] are not interchangeable; although both the inflected form of the verb and the construction wen VB deal with events in the past, the aspectual nature of the construction wen VB is not mirrored at all in the inflected form of the verb. We will find wen VB only when the perspective is focussed on one ofthe limits, either the initium or the finis. It is revealing that wen VB commonly appears in narratives where only the base form is used (see section 3.1.2), since HCE does not need to repeat temporal marking throughout a narrative; once the context has been placed in time the base form suffices. However, even though a narrative may be using base forms for anything denoting the already known time reference, wen VB may still appear, since the aspectual nature of the construction can not be conveyed by the base form. Put differently, although the base form suffices once the time reference is known, is does not capture the aspectual information conveyed by wen VB, which is why the construction will have to be repeated each time that particular aspectual nuance needs to be expressed.
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
144
145
There are certain limits to what kinds of expressions ADterminals can combine with. Negated Es, for instance, do not have an attainment of any limit to put the perspective on. If the limit was never reached there is nothing for an ADterminal to highlight. And, accordingly, wen VB does not combine with negated Es, as the negation voids the attainment of the crucial limit. A sentence like *[hi no wen du 9m] was ungrammatical to my informants and can not be found in my database. Also, an ADterminal would not be expected to be modified by, for instance, start and begin, since one can hardly begin an attainment of something. Again, the combinability (or non-combinability) of wen VB confirms its aspectual nature: *start wen VB and *'begin wen VB are ungrammatical and sentences like *[hi stat/begin wen du am] were immediately and unanimously rejected by my informants. Note that this should not be confused with wen start VB and wen begin VB, which denote the attainment of the initium and thus do not clash with the inherent values of an ADterminal. Consequently, sentences like [hi wen stat/begin du om] were accepted by my informants. The perspective is in this case placed at the starting point ofthe action. ADterminal is a subclass of PFV, and it is common for languages to have a PFV/IPFV distinction. Ofthe 223 languages in the World Atlas of Language Structures (WALS) map dealing with PFV/IPFV aspect (Dahl & Velupillai forthc.a), 108 mark such a distinction. The majority (53) have IPFV as the overtly marked member, whereas only 12 languages, including HCE, have PFV as the overtly marked member. In the remaining 43 languages either both members are marked or the marking relationship is unclear. Note, however, that in HCE the absence of ADterminal merely signifies that the PFV/IPFV opposition is ignored. Based on these figures, and placed in a global perspective, HCE falls in the big group of languages that have a PFV/IPFV distinction, but is typologically "exotic" in that it is PFV that is the overtly marked member. iNTRAterminals in HCE INTRAterminals view the E from within its limits. This concerns an ongoing E in any temporal stratum, as long as the course overlaps with O, which may be at any point on the time scale depending on given temporal indications. The INTRAterminal may be more or less focussed on the nunc, the core of O on the time scale. In other words it may have a certain Focality, i.e. a defined narrowness around nunc. This means that the perspective around the core of O, or the deictic centre,
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
The Basic TMA System in HCE
Hawai 7 Creole English
varies with degree to its relative width in its range of view. The three basic distinctions High Focality, Low Focality and NonFocality more or less correspond to a narrow, expanded and open range of vision around O respectively. In HCE we have three distinct types of INTRAterminals: stay VB, VBing, and stay VB-ing. The construction stay VB denotes an INTRAteiminal^WFOcallty, with a very wide range of vision around O, and more or less encompasses both CONTinuous and HABitual. Consequently a sentence like [wi stae it] could be translated either into SE 'We keep on eating' or 'We usually eat'. What we have is an INTRAterminal with a very wide range of view around the O, both before and after it. VB-ing, on the other hand, indicates lNTRAterminalH18hFocallty, having a fairly narrow focus on nunc, and is roughly equivalent to SE PROGressive. A sentence like [wi itirj] would translate into SE 'We are eating' and would indicate a rather limited range of view, or focus, around O. The difference between stay VB-ing, which is also a type of iNTRAtemiinal^ 0 ^, and VB-ing, is that stay VB-ing has an even narrower perspective around O than VB-ing. Thus [wi itirj] and [wi stae itirj] do not have the same meaning, although they would both have to be translated into SE PROGressive 'We are eating' and 'We are eating (right now)' respectively, since SE does not have an equivalent grammatical marker. The construction stay VB-ing thus has a very narrow range of view around O, giving the whole event a very focussed status and conveys a sense of foregrounding. This highly specialized ]NTRAterminaP^^ltyIMM is, not surprisingly, found predominantly in narratives, where the need for grounding devices is higjier than elsewhere. INTRAterminal is the most widespread viewpoint operator not only in European languages, but also in Arabic and Turkic languages, as well as in several Iranian, Caucasian and Finno-Ugric languages (see Johanson 2000:76ff for language specific examples). Though we are dealing with three separate types of INTRAterminals in HCE, it is worth noting that PROGressive is a well represented category in Dahl (1985), as well as in Bybee et al. (1994; cf. their Table 5.1, pages 128-9, for a list of the sources and modes of expression in the languages of their database). Put in a global perspective, HCE conforms to the majority of the world's languages in having grammatical ways of expressing INTRAterminal.
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
146
147
had VB is a POSTterminal POSTterminals envisage the E after the transgression of its limits. As discussed above, it is not equal to STATE, which rather has to do with focality (the range of view around the deictic centre), or RESULTativity, which has to do with actionality (the inherent properties of the action). The construction had VB denotes that the viewpoint is placed after the transgression of a relevant limit without placing the E at any particular temporal stratum. This is one of the differences between SE and HCE: both have grammatical marking for POSTterminal, but the SE constructions are portmanteau markers interacting with tense, whereas the HCE construction denotes nothing but aspect. That means that in an HCE sentence like [hi haed araiv] the orientation point may coincide with the moment of speech, 0 s , in which case had VB would be translated as SE PerFeCT 'He has arrived'. Or we may have a secondary orientation point, O2, placed prior to 0 s , in which case had VB would be translated into SE PLuPerFeCT 'He had arrived'. Finally we may place O2 posterior to 0 s , in which case had VB would translate into SE FUTure PerFeCT 'He will have had arrived'. The aspectual nature in the construction lies in the fact that the perspective of the E is invariable; only the location of the orientation point(s) is relative on the time axis. POSTterminal is also an extremely widespread category cross-linguistically (Johanson 2000:104). In the European languages, irrespective of language family, POSTterminal tends to interact with tense. Thus POSTterminal-lN-PRESent denotes PerFeCT, for instance has scribbled, which contrasts aspectually with NONPOSTterminal-iN-PAST, or simple PAST, scribbled (see Johanson 2000:104ff for language specific examples). Of our 223 WALS map languages 111 have some kind of PerFeCT (Dahl & Velupillai forthc.c), which means that HCE conforms to half of our cross-linguistic sample. The HABitual HCE has a specific marker for HABitual in the PAST, yustu VB. There is no special marker for PRESent or FUTure HABitual in the database. The data indicates a certain element of remoteness in yustu, and it seems somewhat less optional than the SE used to since it tends to appear among base forms in a narrative where the time reference has been set to the past (cf. the discussion on tense above). In other words, the aspectual element in yustu VB forces the form to appear in narratives although the base form is otherwise sufficient due to the context. It is doubtful whether we could, for instance, replace [smaokidtaim, ai justu
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
The Basic TMA System in HCE
Hawai 7 Creole English
go s^f evri monin] 'When I was small I used to go surfing every morning' with ?[smaokidtaim, ai go ss^f evri monin]. The former expression is quite clearly the preferred one, especially if the speaker is of an advanced age, and it is mostly used to refer to the rather distant past. In Dahl (1985) HABitual met the criteria for 'major TMA category'3 in only 4 of 64 (6 per cent) languages (Dahl 1985: 96). However, Bybee et al. (1994:154, Table 5.5) list 17 of 95 (18 per cent) languages that have HABitual (no overlap with the Dahl 1985 list). The specific PAST:HABitual category "appears in 6-7 languages in the total sample and 4 (22 per cent) in the small sample [i.e. the sample of 11 languages used for statistical generalisations]" (Dahl 1985:100). However, Bybee et al. (1994: 155, Table 5.6) list 9 of 95 languages, where only one (Alawa) also appears in the Dahl 1985 list. The COMPLetive HCE has a COMPLetive marker, pau, which denotes that the E is finished, as in [ai pau it] T (have) finished eating'. It may combine with the HABitual, as an E may be completed repeatedly: [ai justu pau it eit aklak] 'I used to finish eating at 8'; it may also combine with the ADterminal, in which case therms ofthe E is highlighted: [ai wen pau it eit aklak] T finished eating at 8'. COMPLetive is represented in a number of languages, among which the most common known source is a lexical source meaning 'finish' and is expressed as an auxiliary (see Bybee et al. 1994:58, Table 3.2). In other words, HCE conforms to the typologically common pattern by having a COMPLetive marker. 7.1.3 Modality In defining the modal categories of HCE I use theframeworkas presented in Palmer (2001) and Bybee et al. (1994). The fundamental distinctions are between propositional modality (dealing with information) and event modality (dealing with action). The former type of modality thus deals with such connotations as the extent to which the speaker commits him/herself to the truth ofthe information given. Propositional modalities can be divided into two subgroups, evidential and epistemic modality. Evidentials specify the source of the information given (hearsay, eyewitnessing, etc.). They are not found in HCE and will thus not be dealt with here. Epistemic modalities make speaker subjective judgements as to
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
148
149
the truth of the conclusions or opinions uttered, such as, for example, the DEDUCTive JUDgement He must be home, because the door is open. The event modalities, which have to do with action, can also be divided into two main subgroups, deontic and dynamic modalities. Deontics denote speaker imposed conditions on the hearer, such as the OBLlGation You must always lock the door when you leave. Dynamics imply that action is constrained by either internal or external conditions, such as the INABility He can't run faster than that or His car broke down, so he can't come. See Chapter 3 {The Framework of this Study) for an in-depth discussion ofthe framework I use to analyse my data and Chapter 6 {Modality in HCE) for details on the findings. IMPERative versus try VB HCE has two different kinds of REQuests (which both fall into the class of deontics, in event modalities), one expressed by the bare stem, denoting IMPERative, as in [brirj 9m ova hea!] 'Bring it here!', and one expressed by the construction try VB, like, for example, [tjrai brirj om ova hea] 'Could you bring it here (please)?'. The difference between the two lies in POLiteness: the base form (IMPERative) is used for a direct command and would not be appropriate for requests directed to elders or strangers. By using try VB, however, the sense of command is notably lessened, giving the utterance a polite tone. The IMPERative is present in most languages (Palmer 2001:80). HCE thus conforms to the majority of the world's languages. However, it does not seem particularly common to have a politer form of request, though politeness distinctions in general are not unique (Palmer 2001 and Brown & Levinson 1987). This places HCE in a cross-linguistic minority group of languages. Event modality in HCE In addition to the two forms for request there are several other event modalities in HCE, both dynamic (dealing with actions restricted by internal or external conditions) and directive (denoting conditions imposed on the hearer by the speaker). In the latter category we find two types of OBLlGation, have to and gotta/gaDa. They differ in the sense that have to VB does not associate the subject with the obligation, whereas gotta/gaDa VB does. In other words, Associative gotta/gaDa involves subjective values in its motivation for imposing obligations on the agent. Thus the difference between the two is that, on the one
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
The Basic TMA System in HCE
Hawai 'i Creole English
hand, a sentence like [ju hasftu put da lauhala in wara fo^s] 'You must soak the lauhala in water first' does not imply that the speaker is involving him/herself in the obligation {lauhala leaves are simply easier to handle if they have been softened first). On the other hand, an utterance like [ju gara dai om f>s den pantj am] 'You should dye them first, then punch (holes in) them' does involve the subject in the obligation (for instance, the speaker may be indicating that s/he personally finds that particular procedure to give a prettier effect). As expected we do not find gotta/gaDa in past time reference: it is hardly possible to impose obligations on actions that have already taken place. By contrast, DlSASSociative have to does not necessarily involve the subject in the obligation. Instead, the obligations are incited by external factors. DlSSassociative OBLlGation can thus be inflected in the past, since it is possible to refer at a later stage to the external conditions that prompt or prompted the obligation ([wi aoweiz hsed tu put da lauhala in wara f^s] 'We always had to soak the lauhala in water first'). A second Associative deontic modal is the construction should VB (with the stylistic variant ought to VB). This refers not to OBLlGation but to a subjective CONDitional, indicating that according to the speaker an event should, but might in fact not, take place, as in [ju shud breid jo hea] 'You ought to braid your hair'. It is subjective in the sense that it is the speaker's attitude that is reflected. This construction can be found with past time reference, in which case it simply expresses what should have been (according to the subject), but didn't take place. The deontic directive ADMONitive better/beDa VB lets the speaker express a warning, and conveys an element of "or else" to the hearer: [ju bera feis da wara wen ju pik opihi] 'You had better face the water when you pick opihi (or you might drown)'. The warning does not have to be very strong (the consequences need not be very terrible if the warning isn't heeded), and the expression can be translated into either SE 'had better' or 'should probably'. The construction can VB may express either a directive PERMissive, where the speaker grants someone permission to do something (—[ai kaen kam]? —[kaen]. '—May I come? —Yes (you may).'), or a dynamic ABility, which indicates that internal and/or external conditions exist which enable the achievement of an action ([$i kaen wiv lauhala] 'She can (knows how to) weave lauhala'). This single form has two negative forms, cannot and no can, which in the written language material seem to be in free variation and denote either INABility (the
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
15 0
151
material seem to be in free variation and denote either INABility (the opposite of ABility) or PROHlBitive (the opposite of PERMissive) respectively. Thus in written language HCE both He cannot come and He no can come could be translated either into SE 'He is unable to come' or 'He may not come'. However, in the spoken language material the two forms denote one function each: cannot is consistently used for the dynamic INABility, whereas no can is used for the directive PROHlBition. Consequently, spoken language HCE [hi kaena? kam] could only be translated into SE 'He can't (= is unable to) come' whereas [hi no kaen kam] could only be translated into SE 'He can't (= may not) come'. This difference between the spoken and the written material suggests the relevance of sampling a language with respect to variation in register, as well as other domains. Both event modalities ABility and PERMissive are widely attested in the languages ofthe world (Palmer 2001:76ff and van der Auwera & Ammznnforthc.a; cf. also Bybee et al. 1994:188ff, for instance Tables 6.2 and 6.3). This is true also for general OBLlGation, as shown in Table 6.1 in Bybee et al. (1994:182f). Also PROHlBitive seems to be a fairly common category crosslinguistically (Palmer 2001). This suggests that the HCE system is cross-linguistically common with respect to these modalities. Epistemic modality in HCE There are two epistemic modalities in HCE, must and might. Both are JUDgements given about the likelihood of something, but they differ as to the extent the subject is committed to the expressed JUDgement. In order to express a qualified guess a speaker may use the DEDUCTive JUDgement must VB, which indicates that the opinion is based on known facts of the real world. A sentence liken [hi mas bi aedlis fifti jez] 'He must be at least 50 years (old)' suggests a qualified guess based on known facts - from the part of the speaker. On the other hand, if the speaker is merely speculating on possibilities, the SPECULative JUDgement might VB may be used, as in [aenti maid no wea ge?] 'Aunty might know where there are (such things)' (alternatively 'Maybe Aunty knows where there are (such things)'). Epistemic modality is very widespread cross-linguistically (van der Auwera & Ammznnforthc.b). Both DEDUCTive and SPECULative JUDgement seem to be fairly common cross-linguistically (Palmer 2001:24ff). This places HCE with the majority ofthe languages ofthe world.
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
The Basic TMA System in HCE
Hawai 'i Creole English
The DESlDerative The common HCE marker for DESlDerative is like VB, as in [wi laik go] 'We want to go'. This construction is prolific throughout both the written and the spoken language material. It seems to be common in the languages of the world to have a specific DESlDerative category (Palmer 2001), which suggests that HCE's behaviour is cross-linguistically common with respect to this modality. 7.2
HCE and creole studies
Having surveyed the TMA system I now turn to the issues raised in Chapter 1 with respect to the HCE data from the perspective of creole studies. Three issues were discussed there: (a) convergence with SE as the superstrate, (b) variation, in particular in terms of geography, and (c) whether HCE conforms to the LBH predictions. I will consider these in turn. 7.2.1 HCE and SE There is some overlap between the HCE and the SE TMA system, though it is not total. In 7.2, 7.3 and 7.4 below I give an overview of where the similarities of and differences between the two systems lie. Features found in HCE that SE lacks are marked with a "-" in the SE features column, such as the ADterminal {wen VB) or the COMPLetive (pau). Where HCE features denote a meaning expressed by more than one SE category both of the relevant SE categories are listed in the SE features column, such as the lNTRAterminalLF {stay VB) which is expressed by either CONTinuous or HABitual in SE. HCE features that have an SE equivalence are marked "=" in the "SE features" column, such as the PAST:HABitual {yustu VB; SE used to VB). If an HCE feature has a direct equivalence in SE, but it is obligatory in one language and only optional in the other it is marked "=" in the "SE features" column, with a parenthesis "()" added in the language where the feature is optional (see for instance the PRESent tense in 7.3 which is marked as optional in HCE but obligatorily in SE). Three features in 7.4 are marked with a "?" because, although there are ways of expressing these meanings in SE, it is beyond the scope of this study to provide a convincing analysis of whether or not they actually represent distinct modal categories in that language. This does not, however, affect the comparison between the HCE and SE modality systems, since a "?" merely denotes that this is
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
15 2
not a distinct category in SE, while it is so in HCE. In other words, the "?" simply shows that the two modality systems to not overlap with respect to those particular features. As shown in 7.2, there are only two aspectual categories that HCE shares with SE. The first is the INTRAterminal"17, which is equivalent to SE PROGressive (the -ing form), as in He is running. The second is the PAST:HABitual, SE used to, for example We used to go to school by bus. Contrary to SE, HCE has a PFV/IPFV distinction, manifested in the PAST:ADterminal construction wen VB. HCE also has three separate INTRAterminal forms, lNTRAterminalLF {stay VB), INTRAterminal"17 (VB-ing) and INTRAterminal11171^ {stay VB-ing), of which the last is not to be found in SE at all and the first is manifested as two separate categories: CONTinuous, for instance It keeps/kept raining, and HABitual, for example We usually sit here and eat. Furthermore, SE has distinct forms for the various temporal interactions with POSTterminal, such as PerFeCT (/ have eaten) and PLuPerFeCT (/ had eaten), whereas HCE only has one, purely aspectual form had VB, which does not imply any particular tense. Finally, SE does not have a grammaticalized form for COMPLetive, while HCE has pau. The two aspect systems are contrasted in 7.2 below:
H C E FEATURE PASTIAD INTRALF INTRA
INTRAHF INTRA
POST
HF,MM
HCE
SE
CONSTRUCTION
FEATURE
wenVB
-
stayVB VB-ing stay VB-ing hadVB
COMMENT
no PFV/IPFV distinction in SE
CONT
SE differentiates between
HAB
CONT and HAB
= PFCT PLPFCT
PAST:HAB
yustu VB
=
COMPL
pau
-
SE has tense distinctions which HCE lacks
7.2 Differences and similarities between HCE and SE aspect
In the tense system there are more similarities, though again the overlap is not total, as shown in 7.3. For instance, though SE may use the present form instead of, for example, the past in narratives (such as the Historic
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
The Basic TMA System in HCE 153
Present), it is more common to repeat the tense marking as the story unfolds. HCE, on the other hand, will consistently use the base form once the time reference has been established, unless there is need for any specific aspectual marking, i.e. portmanteau markers which in themselves interact with tense. Moreover, both languages have PAST (as in SE / came, or Ijumped) and FUTure, in SE marked by either going to VB {I am going to cut my hair) or will VB {He will show you how to do it). However, SE does not have grammatical marking for remoteness, while HCE possibly has a REMOTE.FUTURE marker in bumbye (as discussed in section 4.4.3). Also, unlike HCE, SE does not have a specific NEGated:PAST form, although it is quite common in colloquial English to express NEGated:PAST with never, for example / never said that T didn't say that' (Milroy & Milroy 1993:67f). The respective tense systems are compared in 7.3: HCE
SE
CONSTRUCTION
FEATURE
EreIR
base form
-
PRES
(-*) inflected go(i)n(g)lgonna VB bumbye
=
H C E FEATURE
PAST
FUT REM.FUT
COMMENT
SE needs to repeat tense marking in a narrative PRES marking is obligatory in SE but optional in HCE
= = -
7.3 Differences and similarities between HCE and SE tense
When it comes to the modal system, the most striking difference is that the SE forms for event modality and propositional modality overlap, whereas the HCE forms do not.4 Thus SE MAY denotes both epistemic possibility (SPECULative JUDgement), as in He may have done it, and deontic possibility (PERMissive), such as Yes, you may taste it. Similarly SE MUST indicates both epistemic necessity (DEDUCTive JUDgement), as in (Her hair looks different) she must have had a hair cut, as well as deontic necessity (OBLlGation), You must take bus 2 to get there. HCE, on the other hand, has distinct forms for each of these categories: epistemic possibility (SPECULative JUDgement) is expressed by might VB, but deontic possibility (PERMissive) is expressed by can VB. The two are not inter-changeable. As for necessity, the HCE must VB only denotes epistemic necessity (DEDUCTive JUDgement), while deontic necessity (OBLlGation) is indicated by gotta/gaDa VB or have to VB. The difference between gotta/gaDa VB and have to VB lies in the degree the speaker is associated with the obligation. See 7.4 below.
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
154 Hawai 7 Creole English
The Basic TMA System in HCE 155 SE
CONSTRUCTION
FEATURE
base form tryVB betterIbeDa VB
= =
should VB
?
DISASS.OBLIG ASS.OBLIG
have to VB gotta/gaDa VB
OBLIG
DEDUCT.JUD
must VB
SPECUL.JUD
might VB
IMPER POL.REQ ADMON (ASS) COND OBLIG
JUD
EPIST NEC EPIST POSSIB
PERM
canVB
=
AB INAB PROHIB DESID
canVB cannot VB no can VB like VB
H
COMMENT
The same form (must VB) is used for both OBLIG and JUD in SE, whereas HCE has distinct forms. The same form (may VB) is used for both JUD and PERM in SE, whereas
HCE has distinct forms
9
?
-
7.4 Differences and similarities between HCE and SE modality
In addition to the abovementioned, HCE has a grammatical DESlDerative marker {like) whereas SE does not. The HCE ADMONitive better/beDa VB is comparable with the SE expression had better VB, as in You had better be back before midnight (or else!). Finally, both languages have an IMPERative (for example SE Come here!), but HCE also has a POLiter form of REQuest, try VB, which is not found in SE. Thus, of the 25 HCE TMA features discussed, only 7 have direct equivalences in SE; 2 have direct equivalences in SE but differ in obligatoriness and as such indicate only partial overlap between the languages; 10 have no grammatical equivalences in SE (including 3 marked as "?" in the SE column); finally 6 of the HCE categories fall into different types of SE categories, and therefore only overlap partially. Whether or not this indicates a convergence with SE, due to, for instance, contact, can only be established by comparing this synchronic data with older data. As my informants range from the age of 22 to 95, possible variation between generations might indicate paths of change. The next section will therefore deal with the variation patterns exhibited in my data.
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
HCE
H C E FEATURE
Hawai 'i Creole English
7.2.2 Variation in HCE There are several factors that may produce variation within a language. Geography is an evident instance of possible dialect differences; communities separated from each other as a result of distance or topographical peculiarities tend to develop distinct language varieties which may diverge from each other due to lack of contact between the speakers. Gender, age and ethnicity ofthe speaker, individually or in combination with each other, are other factors according to which people tend to group together, and as such may give rise to different language varieties. Another typical domain of language variation is register; with the difference in use between, for instance, written and spoken language, various elements in the grammar of a language may be employed differently and may consequently develop or evolve differently. We have seen that HCE shows some geographical variation. The aspect marker POSTterminal {had VB) is vastly more common on Kaua'i than any other island. In the tense system we saw that bumbye was most common on Hawai'i, with 50 per cent ofthe occurrences, and on Kaua'i, with 30 per cent ofthe occurrences. Note that in both of these instances it is the peripheral islands that have the highest frequency of occurrences of the respective features. It is beyond the scope of this study to delve deeper into the possible reasons for these patterns, but I suggest that future research take the population history ofthe islands of Hawai'i into consideration when determining the various paths of grammaticalization and dialect variation of HCE. It seems to me that the fact that it was the peripheral islands (Hawai'i and Kaua'i) that were the first to be frequented by foreigners on a large scale might have an effect on the language. For instance, if HCE has existed longer on these islands, or has been used more intensively on these islands due to the heavy contact compared to the other islands, certain features may have had a chance to grammaticalize more on Hawai'i and Kaua'i. Also, the ethnic composition and the immigration history and subsequent demographic composition of the respective islands might serve as one ofthe explanations for variety between the islands. We have also seen that HCE varies with respect to register. In particular, the written material appears to show free variation between the forms cannot and no can, whereas the recorded material (both naturalistic and elicited) shows a distinction between the forms and tends to use cannot for INABility and no can for PROHlBition. Register variation may arise for a number of reasons: spoken language has immediate feedback from the audience/hearer, written language does not; spoken
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
156
157
language can constantly be modified in real time, whereas written language can not; spoken language may make use of body language and gestures to modify or clarify a message, whereas written language can not, etc. Due to the different natures in use between spoken and written language, certain features may develop separate paths of grammaticalization in the two register varieties. It is beyond the scope of this study to provide possible explanations for these patterns in variations listed above, so I leave further discussion on this to future research. I have dealt exclusively with tense, mood and aspect in this study. However, there is no reason to suppose that other domains of HCE grammar will not display variation. The patterns we have seen in this particular analysis were confined to geographical dialects and variation in register. It should be noted that my data consists of informants of ages 22-95, both male and female, and from six different ethnic groups (Hawaiian, Chinese, Portuguese, Japanese, Filipino, and Korean; see section 2.2 for a detailed discussion on my choice of data and sampling methods). That we have not seen any variation in the TMA system with respect to age, gender or ethnicity of the speaker by no means implies that these factors are irrelevant for variation in HCE in other grammatical categories. It would in all likelihood be profitable to conduct further and more detailed research on variation in other domains of HCE grammar, such as plural marking or relative clauses, etc. 7.2.3 HCE and LBH: Some implications Bickerton (1980[1974]) bases his LBH to a large extent on similarities between HCE, Guyanese, Haitian and Sranan with respect to the TMA system. He lists the following characteristics as typically creole: a. the zero form marks simple past for action verbs and nonpast for state verbs. b. a marker of anterior aspect indicates past-before-past for action verbs and simple past for state verbs. c. a marker of irrealis aspect indicates 'unreal time' (= future, conditionals, subjunctives, etc.) for all verbs. d. a marker of nonpunctual aspect indicates durative or iterative aspect for action verbs, and is indifferent to the nonpast/past distinction; this marker cannot normally co-occur with state verbs. e. all markers can combine, but in an invariant ordering, which is: 1. anterior. 2. irrealis. 3. nonpunctual. (Bickerton 1980[1974]:5f)
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
The Basic TMA System in HCE
Hawai 'i Creole English
According to this prediction, HCE would have one anterior tense, one irrealis mood and one nonpunctual aspectual marker. However, HCE does not conform to this prediction. We have seen in Chapter 1 that the aspectual system in HCE is much more complex than the single predicted nonpunctual marker {stay). In addition to the construction stay VB, which specifically denotes INTRALF, there are also two other INTRAterminals, stay VB-ing (INTRAterminal^1^) and VB-ing (iNTRAterminar). There are also a number of other aspectual categories: the construction wen VB is a portmanteau marker expressing PAST:ADterminal; the construction hadVB (subject to geographical variation) denotes POSTterminal; the construction yustu VB expresses PAST:HABitual; and finally, pau indicates COMPLetive. The tense system in HCE is also more complex than the LBH predicts. Apart from the fact that the suggested anterior marked wen VB does not in fact express anterior tense (see section 5.1), HCE differs from the LBH prototype in its tense system in that there is a grammatical PAST (the inflected form, unless ADterminal aspect is indicated through wen VB), as well as a FUTure {go(i)n(g)/gonna). Furthermore, the latter, which is not modal in its nature, may have a possible REMoteness distinction in bumbye. There is also the option to use the base form once the temporal location of the event is already known through previous tense marking or through time adverbials. In other words, the meaning conveyed by the base form is not determined by whether the verb is an action verb or not (see (a) in the predictions listed above). When it comes to the modality system, there is no similarity at all between the LBH prediction and the actual system we find in contemporary HCE. We have seen that the suggested irrealis marker go/gon does not mark irrealis and that it is in fact two separate forms, go VB marking ACTion and gon VB marking FUTure. We have also seen that the HCE modal system is quite elaborate compared to (c) listed in the predictions above. Like most of the languages of the world, there is an IMPERative for direct commands. There is also a POLiter form of REQuest, try VB.5 Propositional modality and event modality are manifested as separate forms, and both categories have two further distinctions dealing with the relative subjectivity of the utterance. Thus epistemic (propositional modality) must VB denotes DEDUCTive JUDgement whereas might VB refers to SPECULative JUDgement, differing in the extent the speaker wishes to commit him/herself to he truth of the utterance. When it comes to event modalities, the deontics have to VB, expressing DiSASSociative OBLlGation, and gaDa VB, indicating Associative OBLlGation, differ in the extent the speaker involves him/herself with the obligation. A further
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
15 8
159
deontic modality, should VB, denotes a subjective CONDitional. In addition to all this, there are the two negative forms cannot and no can indicating INABility and PROHlBition respectively (in free variation in written HCE, but not interchangeable in spoken HCE). Finally, HCE has a DESlDerative marker like. The fact that HCE does not conform to the LBH prediction is hardly surprising. In Singler (1990b), where the TMA systems of a number of pidgin and creole languages are described, we see that there is a considerable amount of discrepancy between the LBH assumptions and the actual findings. For instance, Andersen (1990) notes that the tense system of Papiamentu is rather close to the LBH, but that the aspect system conflicts with it "in the way Papiamentu maps meaning onto form" (Andersen 1990:89). Spears (1990) concludes that the Haitian markers have functions different from those listed in the LBH, and that the zero form has a broader use than predicted. Silva (1990) notes that Capeverdean Crioulo not only has a more refined system and features with different functions than assumed in LBH, but also that the anterior marker is postverbal instead of preverbal. He concludes that "the explanation provided in Bickerton (1981) does not adequately deal with the data" (Silva 1990:163). Similarly, the tense/aspect system of Kituba is rather more complex than the LBH gives room for (Mufwene 1990), with its three basic tenses (Anterior or E before R, Concomitant or E simul R, and Subsequent or E after R\ its Narrative tense, as well as its four basic aspects (Perfect, Durative, Habitual and Perfective/Completive). There are, needless to say, numerous other studies with similar results of which I will mention only a couple. Shnukal (1998) shows that Broken has two distinct tense markers, bilbin (Past) and go (Future). It also has six core aspect markers kip (Iterative), nomo (Cessative), oltaim (Habitual), pinis (Completive), stat (Inceptive), and stil (Continuative). Furthermore there are six modal verbs, kan 'can't', kin 'can', mas 'have to, must, etc.', spostu 'ought to, should, etc.', sud 'ought to, should', and kasa 'just, with no purpose'. Huber (1999) shows that Ghanaian Pidgin English only has one optional tense (Sequential), has six modalities (Irrealis, Ability, Permission, Deontic, Intentionalis, and Imperative), and has three aspects (Nonpunctual, Ingressive/Sequentialis6 and Completive, the latter being postverbal). Though this obviously is no exhaustive list of creole languages that do not conform to the LBH predictions, it serves as an illustration ofthe fact that HCE is not unique in differing from the system set up in the hypothesis. I can think of three possible implications of this discrepancy.
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
The Basic TMA System in HCE
Hawai 7 Creole English
One, that my data or my analysis ofthe data is wrong. I will leave that for future research to establish. Two, that Bickerton's data or his analysis of the data that led him to form the LBH is wrong. I will comment on that below. Three, that Bickerton's data or his analysis of the data that led him to form the LBH was right and that HCE has changed radically in the last 30 odd years. We would then have an instance of decreolization, given that HCE has been in very close contact with SE at all times, or we would have what Bickerton (1980) calls 'spontaneous change', i.e. internally motivated change. Decreolization is commonly defined as the process by which a basilect moves towards the acrolect. What we have seen, however, is that HCE is not very similar to SE in its TMA system. In fact the dissimilarities are rather noteworthy, since they range from one system having obligatory categories that are only optional in the other, to differences in function of the various categories in the respective languages, and even further to one language having categories that the other completely lacks. If the reason for the discrepancy between the LBH predictions and the TMA system we find in contemporary HCE were due to decreolization, we would expect the present system to be closer to the acrolect (SE) than the HCE data that the LBH was formed on is. Since this is not the case, as shown above, I find it unlikely that we are dealing with decreolization. As this is a synchronic description, my only means for checking whether HCE has undergone a drastic 'spontaneous' or internally motivated change is the so called "apparent time" approach, where data from the older speakers are compared with that from the younger ones.7 We have already seen that data variation in the TMA system does not depend on age; the speakers from those areas that use had VB and bumbye are of different ages (in fact, my youngest speaker, the 22-year old, comes from the same town on the same island as my oldest one, the 95-year old). Given that neither decreolization, nor internally motivated change serve as adequate explanations for the discrepancy between HCE and the predictions ofthe LBH, the general implication of my study is that the LBH needs revision. A further general implication, at least when it comes to the TMA systems, is that we still do not have valid typological parameters to group creole languages as a structural type of language. As argued in the Introduction, in order to be able to single out a group of languages as a structural type of languages, we need to show that they behave a certain way with respect to a given set of parameters. If a language merely behaves as the majority of all other languages in the
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
160
161
world, then we have no specific characteristic by which to single out this language. The fact that the HCE TMA system behaves in a typologically common way does not justify us to claim that this is what makes it a 'creole' system - in that case all those non-creole languages in the cross-linguistic studies which fall in the same group and thus make up the majority of languages in those particular studies would also have to be said to show a typically 'creole' system. As I have already stated, I do not necessarily reject the notion of Creoles forming a certain type of language. I am merely claiming that the necessary parameters for doing so have not been defined yet.
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
The Basic TMA System in HCE
162
Hawai 'i Creole English
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
It is beyond the scope of this study to address the issue of the extent of influence there has been from SE during the emergence and existence of HCE. See Section 4.4.3 for a discussion of why this is, if anything, a recent phenomenon on those islands. See Dahl (1985:52ff) for a definition of 'major TMA categories'. Note that it is more common cross-linguistically not to have overlap between grammatical epistemic modality and event modality (van der Auwera & Ammann forthc.c). HCE thus conforms to the globally more common pattern, whereas SE falls into the globally more uncommon pattern. Cf. Meyerhoff (2000:114) for an example of 'try' being used as a politeness marker in Bislama. See Huber (1999) for a discussion on how to interpret kam VB. This is, incidentally, the method Bickerton (1977) used to arrive at his conclusions.
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
Notes
This section gives a few samples of longer texts, one narrative from each island, except O'ahu (see 2.2.5), as well as one dialogue passagefromKaua'i. The code for each speaker is given at the beginning ofthe text, but proper names and place names have been replaced by a letter code. Needless to say, opinions or beliefs uttered do not reflect my personal opinions or beliefs. The choice ofthe texts is based not only on my wish to give samplesfromas many islands as possible (and to cover some interesting topics), but also on such considerations as whether the session was relaxed. The various texts also allow for different narrative techniques and illustrate the TMA categories discussed in this study. The first text (Face to face with a shark) describes a past event that contains a lot of action. The second text (Menehunes - the little people) tells us stories about the "little people", the menehunes. In the third text (Traditional Medicine) the speaker describes what she was taught to do in certain situations. The fourth text (Politics: the year 2000 election) is a friendly debate about a coming election, and the speakers are making predictions of what they think will or ought to happen, based on what has already happened. In the last text (How to choose a poi stone) the speaker is describing the procedure he was taught to go by in choosing a stone, what to expect and how to behave.
FACE TO FACE WITH A SHARK (MH29MA) Jaks jae ge? big kainjaks big kain sharks yeah EXIST big kind sharks big kind
| a kaem akras | wan I came across a
priri big wan | -laughs- | in W wsa wi liv | pretty big one in W where we live Sharks? Yeah, there are big sharks , big sharks. I came across a pretty big one laughs- in W where we live. VV:jea| Yeah? jea yeah
wi wn go lei ne? wan nai? we PAST:AD ACT lay net one night
ne? da neks net the next
mornin wi leid ova morning we laid over
nai? night
wi wn go pik ap da we PAST:AD ACT pick up the |
Yeah, we went and laid nets one night and we picked them up the next morning we had laid over night. 163 10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
Appendix 1: Texts
164 so so
Hawai 7 Creole English wi wz goin pikin we was go.lNTRAHF pick.INTRAHF
ap up
da ne? | the net
haed
samtin
reo big in da
EXIST something wi
kaetj
we catch
ne? so
real big in the net so
wan big ulua o
samtin
a
something
big ulua or
a wz lukin
laik o
meibi
I was look.lNTRAHF
like oh
maybe
| -cough- |
There was something really big in the net, so I was looking like, oh, maybe we had caught a big ulua [a type of fish] or something -coughso so
he here
ai am ai
pikin
da HF
I am I
pick.iNTRA
ne? laik o
the net like ah
jea
am ao
haspi
yeah
I'm all
happy
So here I am, I'm pulling the net like ah, yeah, I'm all happy. so so
wi wn ge? we PAST:AD POSS
ao
kain
lai
all
kind
like that
rat
ao all
dis kain this kind
labste3 lobsters
wi get we POSS
aweaweo kumu aweaweo kumu
|
So we had got all these lobsters, we had aweaweo [red fishes], kumu [Haw. goatfish], all sorts of things like that. so so
a luk e I look eh
raid on right on
wi ge? we POSS
samtin something
big ulua big ulua
so so
a go go go I go.INTENS
|
So I look, eh, great, we have something big, ulua, so I go, go, go. da
wara
kam
ao
ma^ki |
da
water
become
all
murky
The water became all murky. asn 3^1 [i]
in
da
and early
in
the morning well
manin
we —s | weo faiv siks okbk well five six o'clock
in
da
in
the morning
manin
And early in the morning well ...well five, six o'clock in the morning. so so
| h^
a kam
here I come
a gerin
klose
aen klose
meibi fro[m] mi
tuju
I get.lNTRAHF closer and closer maybe from me to you
So here I come, I'm getting closer and closer, maybe like from me to you.
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
|
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
So we were going picking up the nets.
Appendix 1: Texts di3 ne? kam3 ap this net comes up
mi raid me right
in in
| di3 b— di3 big Ja[k] this this big shark
kam come
raid right
ap up
in in
fran front
ma feis | my face
So this net comes up, this— this big shark comes right up in front of me, right in my face. ad I'd
sae abaut meibi | meibi eit say about maybe maybe eight
plas da jak | plus the shark
I'd say about maybe— maybe eight plus, the shark. na? reo big ba mei[bi] not real big bat maybe
aba about
ei? | meibi ei? eight maybe eight
tweo mem twelve
ei[t] eight
ten ten
tut Jak | foot shark Not very big, but maybe about eight, maybe eight, twelve— an eight, ten foot shark. a tjrap I drop
eritin everything
rai[d] dea | right there
I dropped everything right there. a tjrap I drop
eritin everything
ma haed my head
mi a tjro raid me I throw right
ma fins in my fins in
on on
a bitj a haed ma gagolz the beach I had my goggles
on on
ma haend lai? | my hand like
I dropped everything, I threw right on the beach, I had my goggles on my head, my fins in my hand. m[a]
arjko
jeo ee
d3aekaes a
baga
my
uncle
yell eh
jackass
bugger you pick up
net a aent
go[in]
in
net I ain't
go.lNTRAHF in
swim swim swim
ah a
ji
wara
| so
the water
so
pik ap
ji
on
frikifn]
your
on
freaking
a kam
slo
a kam
a
I come
slow
I come
I
| -cough- |
swim.lNTENS My uncle yelled "Eh jackass!" "Ah, bugger you pick up your own freaking nets! I ain't going in the water!", so I come slowly, I come, I swim, swim, swim, -cough-
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
so so
165
166
Hawai 7 Creole English
da Jak the shark
waz in da ne? stio friski da Jak | was in the net still frisky the shark
The shark was in the net still lively, the shark <was>. wan big kumu in
da
a
the mouth
big kumu
in
maut
|
had a big kumu in the mouth. so so
m[a] my
anko uncle
wen hemu PAST:AD pull.out
aen hi
wen
and he
PAST:AD swim
swim da
da—| hemu the pull.out
da fij* n da Jak the fish and the shark
J— |
the
So my uncle pulled out the— pulled out the fish and the shark, and he swam <with> the— he
waz raid
ontop da
he
was right
on.top the shark
Jark
da
baek ov
da
the back of
Jak |
the shark
He was right on top ofthe shark, on the back ofthe shark. hi he
wn swim da Jak PASTIAD swim the shark
raid right
ontu onto
ra bitj | the beach
He swam <with> the shark right onto the beach. s laik wo | wan priri haevi wanji no is like wow a pretty heavy one you know It was like, wow, a pretty cool thing, you know. JU30H wan Jak
wuden
usually a
wouldn't let
shark
let
ju
d3amp on
you jump
on
hi3 baek
|
his back
Usually a shark wouldn't let you jump on his back. m[a]
anko
waz raid
ontop hi3 baek
swimin
my
uncle
was right
on.top his back
swim.lNTRAHF with
wi[d] di[f] this
My uncle was right on top of his back, swimming with this shark. go
ontop on
a
go
on.top on
the beach
bitj |
They went right onto the beach.
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Jak shark
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
haed POSS
Appendix 1: Texts wz laik wan wz da fs'-s taim was like one was the first time
167
a eva so wan Jak I ever saw a shark
MENEHUNES - THE LITTLE PEOPLE (MJ50K) de menehunis | a rono the menehunes I NEG.know The menehunes ... I don't know. de justu tel mi wan stori they PAST:HAB tell me a story ra | kamiunitihal the community.hall
(a)baut about
de | rait the right
bai Wskul | ap by W.school up
ore ji no goin ap HF over.there you know go.lNTRA up
ba by
ba by
ra X ove dea the X over there
They used to tell me a story about them, right by W school, up near the community hall over there, you know going up by the X over there. waz wn menehunetjreol | was a menehune.trail It was a menehune trail. asn den has da ol infask get stil ast and then PAST-.EXIST the old in.fact EXIST still at neks next
tu tu
ra X the X
da X ove the X over
rea there
raid right
justu get da faiasteijen | PAST:HAB EXIST the fire.station
And there was the old— in fact it's still there at the X over there, right next to the X, there used to be a fire station. was wan smaol bilin | was a small building It was a small building. asn den | evritaim and then every.time hea [ samtin hear something
da faiamasn the firemen
wakin walking
ova over
justu teol PAST:HAB say
| naitaim | de ken night.time they AB
ra ruf | asn den justu the roof and then PAST:HAB
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
tel ass say that
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
was like a— was the first time I ever saw a shark.
168
Hawai 7 Creole English
was da menehune was the menehune
tjreol | trail
And the firemen always used to say that they could hear something walking over the roof in
raid right
ova over
da ruf the roof
de teol they say
|
Right over the roof, they said. dass
da
kain
| menehune
that's the kind
stori
|
menehunes story
That's a menehune story. infask | mai nebo
ris
in.fact
this old Japanese.guy
hi he
my neighbour
ol
d3aspenigai
| sked scared
laig
hel ji
like
hell you know
no
was was
In fact my neighbour, this old Japanese guy - you know he was scared like hell. bat | evritaim but every.time
hi he
ah ah
| hi he
go go
askras da riva across the river
ba by
Psai je | P.side yeah
fijin | aet fishing at
hi he
justu PAST:HAB
go go
fijin fishing
But , every time he, ah, he went fishing, at— he used to go fishing across the river, near P, yeah. tjro
hiz lain | weit
throw his
line
| kam
wait
become
dak
laig rast
dark
like that
throw his line and wait <even till> it became dark. aefta
ra
after
the sunset he
sanset hi
ste ova re
fijin
LOC over there
fishing
After the sunset he was over there fishing. wan taim
hi
saed | hi
wa[s] sidin
one time
he
said
was
he
daun
hi
sit.lNTRAHF down he
tat
hi
wa[s]
thought
he
was
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
the night, and they used to say that that was the menehune trail.
Appendix 1: Texts sidin daun sit.iNTRAHF down
on on
169
wan kokonat | a coconut
aen wen and when
hi he
wan
skal
a
skull
bin luk | hi PAST:AD look he
wen Jam PASTrAD shine
his flaejlait | waz his flashlight was
|
And when he looked, <when> he shone his flashlight, it was a skull. hi
was— hi
wen
get so—so
sked
he
was
PAST:AD
get
scared PASTIAD
he
so
so
liv
his poi
in
a
leave
his pole
in
the water
wara
bin
dig aut hi
bin
run
PAST:AD
out
he
evritirj everything
He was— he got so, so scared he ran off, he left his pole in the water and everything. hi
d3es
wen
he
just
PAST:AD run out
dig aut |
He just ran away. asfta
rast pau
after
that COMPL he
hi
go
hi
no
NEG go
no
he
NEG go
go
| fiji[n] nartaim fishing night.time
asfta
das |
after
that
After that, he stopped, he didn't— he didn't go fishing in the night. wen when
da san ste go raun the sun .go down
pau hi COMPL he
go go
horn horn
|
When the sun goes down, he stops and goes home. bat hi
was telin
but he
was tell.lNTRAHF us
ra the da
| s win in
in
W
swinging bridge in
W
ditj
the ditch
brid3
as
wen
hi
wa[s] smao
kid | hi
waz ap
ba
when
he
was
kid
was up
by
| asn ass and that's
small we
de
he
menehuniz haed
meig
where the menehunes POST
make
je yeah
But he was telling us, that when he was a small kid he was up by the swinging bridge in W, and that's where the menehunes had made the ditch, yeah.
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
Once, he said, he was sitting, and he thought he was sitting on a coconut.
170
Hawai 7 Creole English
da menehuneditj the menehune.ditch
je yeah
ove over
rea | there
The menehune ditch, yeah, over there. hi
waz raidin
so
hi
was ride.iNTRAHF his bike he
hiz baik hi
tu
Jeik
to
shake
tel
al
af
a saden de
said all
of
a sudden the bike
baik
sta[t] start
So he was riding his bike, and he said that all of a sudden the bike started to shake. hi he
no kasn INAB
rai[d] da baik | ride the bike
He couldn't ride the bike. asn den al
af
a saden hi
saed | hi
wen
and then all
of
a sudden he
said
PAST:AD fall down
he
fal
daun
fom
da
from
the bike
baik|
And then all of a sudden, he said, he fell from the bike. aen den and then
a rono I NEG.know
if if
was tel in az was tell.iNTRAHF us
bulai lie
o or
wat what
| da baik bin end ap the bike PAST:AD end up
on on
wan tjok plamtjri a huge plum.tree
da kain hi wachamacallit hi
saed ah said ah
ove over
re swirjin brid3 | the swinging bridge
re there
ba by
bat but
And then - I don't know if he was lying to us but, wachamacallit, he said, ah that the bike ended up in a huge plum tree over there near the swinging bridge. hi saed | sam
ol
hi said
old Hawaiian lady PAST:AD say him oh
some
hawaien laedi wen
ste matjin ju no kasn march you PROHIB
ste in LOC in
tel
him oh
get— da
menehune[s]
EXIST the menehunes
a we | the way
He said that some old Hawaiian lady said to him "Oh, there are the— the menehunes are marching, you can't be in the way". so so
| ass that's
wad what
hasd POST
haspen happen
tu to
hiz baik his bike
|
So that's what had happened to his bike.
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
so
Appendix 1: Texts eh eh
171
bat da baga wa[s] sked laik hel | but the bugger was scared like hell
Eh, but the bugger was scared like hell. aut naitaim out night.time
|
They come out in the night. du
re
do
the job
d3ab
finij
de
finish
the job
d3ab
| pau
|
COMPL
Do the job, finish the job. Pau. a
rono
I
NEG.know
|
dekain
naudeiz
de
tel
nowadays
they
tell us
de
f^s
wachamacallit the
first
az
dekain
da
menehunez
wachamacallit the menehunes
gais
fo
kam
guys
COMPLEM
come
| asn da kain
|
and wachamacallit
I don't know ... nowadays they tell us - wachamacallit - that the menehunes, ah, were the first guys to come, and so on. so
| a
so
I
rono
|
NEG.know
So I don't know. bikaz | ass because that's
wa re hasd wat they POST
da fi^s gais the first guys
fo COMPLEM
la-fn] nau— naudeis learn now nowadays
kam come
d[a] arid3inol the original
| da | the
was | de gais | was da menehunis | was the guys was the menehunes
Because, that's what they've learned now— nowadays, that the original, the— the first guys to come were those guys, were the menehunes. asfta
rem
keim
da
after
them
came
the wachamacallit Tahitians yeah
dekain
tahijens je
|
After them came the, ah, Tahitians, yeah. de
tahijens
the Tahitians
was | big bagas
tu
was
too them
big buggers
dem
|
The Tahitians, they were big buggers too.
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
dei kam they come
172
Hawai 7 Creole English
de—de they they
was faidez was fighters
je | yeah
They were fighters, yeah. waz was
|
Well, ahm, the menehunes, they were ... VV: smalij... Smallish je
de
was
leiba
yeah
they
was
labour eh
eh
Yeah, they were labour, eh. de
meik
walz
de
gaiz
they
make
walls
they
guys
kantjra—dakain
kanjtrakjerjaiz
dem
wachamacallit construction.guys
them
They make walls, those guys were, wachamacallit, construction people. da ara the other
gaiz guys
waz were
| wariez eh warriors eh
|
The other guys were warriors. tahijens ass Tahitians that's bil build
al all
di[s] this
wai why staf stuff
de wen dakain | juz da menehunez fo they PAST:AD wachamacallit use the menehunes COMPLEM |
The Tahitians. That's why they, ah, used the menehunes to build this stuff. ass
wa
re
gais
that's
what
the guys
hasd
akarin
tu
ra
storiz
POST
according
to
the stories
je yeah
That's what the guys had <done> according to the stories, yeah. ji
no
da
you know
gaiz
the guys
haid
in
a
PAST.AD run out ACT hide
wen
in
the mountain
de
neva
laik
they
NEG:PAST
DESID work
wa^k
dig aut go
maunten | bikaz because
|
You know, the guys ran away, hid in the mountains, because they didn't want to work.
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
wel dekain menehunes de well wachamacallit menehunes they
Appendix 1: Texts fos wa^k— forced work
fos w&k forced work
je yeah
de gaiz the guys
mo more
173
big | big
bamba REM.FUT
ged likin get punishing
boi | -chucklesboy
Eventually whatever that scandal was with the woman. I say, yeah, but when you read about those guys that -unintelligible- in the beginning, if they were living with C they would tar and feather the guy! He wouldn't have got off. They would have tar and feather him and paraded him down P. With tar and feather. A:
eh
bat | bat mi
eh
but
aez a maen
but me as
ass
he
that's
her fault
no
a man
folt
bleim— a
NEG blame
no NEG
I
bleim blame
a no
bleim him
hiz
wn masn
laig
I NEG
blame him
he's
a
like
man
asnibadi els | anyone
else
Eh, but— but me as a man, I don't blame— I don't blame C. That's her fault. I don't blame him. He's a man like anyone else. B:
je
| bat | hi
da
preziden of
yeah
but
he
the president of
no know
hau how
tu to
eksplem | hi explain he
de
junaidedsterts aen
the United States supos tu supposed to
bi be
and
hi
neva
he
NEG:PAST
wn smat a smart
gai | guy
Yeah, but, he's the president ofthe United States, and he didn't know how to explain. He's supposed to be a smart guy. A:
da da maen the the man natin
| Ji
nothing
masn man went
she went
da wahine the woman
no go NEG go
bigos
JI
because
she DESID
laik
wid with
| Ji
bin
him him
hi he laik
no kasn PROHIB mani
du do tu
|
she PAST:AD DESID money too
The—the man—man, the woman didn't go with him, he wasn't allowed to do anything. She went because she wanted to, she wanted money too. B:
asn | hi
bin
and
PAST:AD provide
he
provai
da
rum -laughs-
the room
And he provided the room.
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
asn perei him daun P and parade him down P
179
180 A:
Hawai 7 Creole English so so
a rono I NEG.know
a no I NEG
bleim him blame him
| mi am me I'm
fo for
him him
|
| de
gai wa[d]
B:
aen
hi
bin—
and
he
PAST:AD
And he— A:
wai why
Ji go she go
|
Why did she go? B:
asn
hi
bin
and
he
PAST:AD provide
provai
da
rum—
the room
And he provided the room. A:
nat oni
him
bin
not only
him
PAST:AD do
das? that
| de J wad the what
dei they
de they
du
daet | wi—
ah
dakain
that
nat J de are not the other
who.was.it bage | wat bugger what
the guy what
was de presden was the president
bin kil om | PAST:AD kill him
Not only he did that, ah what's-his-name, the guy, what was it, J— no not J, the other bugger. Who was the president they killed? B:
de R—
R? A:
no
| eh—
No, eh.... B:
lets
pud
i[d] dis was
let's
put
it
this way
| dei prabobli
al
baed—
they probably
all
bad
Let's put it this way: they're probably all bad. A:
al
dem—
all
them
All of them
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
So I don't know. I don't blame him, me, I'm for him.
B:
hi he
Appendix 1: Texts
181
in in
a the
da wan get kot -laughs- | the one get caught
A:
get— haed wan gai rea EXIST PAST:EXIST a guy there ofis
| haed
office
POSS
| eh
wan
wahini
fo
a
woman
for his
haed
wan
gap]
PAST:EXIST
a
guy
his | hi he
juz ha^ | ass
hi[s]
use her
his
ass
sekrederi dass gavm— ji no da steit pein ha^ | fo secretary that's you know the state pay.lNTRAHF her COMPLEM
bi be
sekreteri | fo
bi
his hasfmeit | dei ne—hi
nad
ran
secretary
be
his half.mate
NEG
wrong he
COMPLEM
nad
ran | pein
NEG
wrong pay.lNTRAHF her wage
bi be
he
they
weid3 kauntimani
he bu
Ji
nat supos
hi
tu
counti.money but she NEG supposed to
dea— there
There's — there was a guy there, eh, there was a guy in the office that had a woman for his ... he used her as his secretary. That's gover— you know the state is paying her, to be a secretary, to be his mistress they didn— wasn't he wrong, wasn't he wrong? Paying her wage but she wasn't <even> supposed to be there? B:
so so
bad— but
So but... A:
fo
ste
COMPLEM
LOC
wid with
him— him
To be with him. B:
si
asn hi—
see and he See and he A:
aen hiz rai?
| no
and he's right
no
ass
rorj
that's
wrong
And he's right? No, that's wrong.
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
<But> he was the one who got caught
182 B:
Hawai 7 Creole English je yeah
id it
wz rarj bad hi was wrong but he
neva NEG:PAST
ge kot | C hi get caught he
get kot— get caught
A:
KK
| hi he
hd
d3raun
wan wahini | eh
POST
drown
a
| K d3raun
woman
wan wahini—
drown
a
woman
K, K. He drowned a woman. K drowned a woman. B:
bat | asn wen
de
but
the Americans
and when
asmerikenz wen
hi
wz wan plasboi | si C wen
he
was a
daes
de
the difference
dei
niu knew
they
difrens
K
| dei nu
supos
aredi
they knew
tu bi kamin
already
skwikiklin |
see PAST:AD supposed tobecome.lNTRAHF squeaky.clean
playboy
that's
ilefk]
PAST:AD elect
| de
K
the
daet da
gad elekted
hi
wz aredi
wn plasboi |
got elected
he
was already
a
gav— de they
that the
kam
in
laig hi
wz wan pris—
come
in
like he
was a
playboy
daed
bin
ilek
om | C wen
that
PAST:AD
elect
him
PAST:AD
priest
But — and when the Americans elected K, they knew already he was a playboy. See, C was supposed to be coming squeaky clean. That's the difference. <When> K got elected he was already a playboy, they knew that the gov— the ones who elected him. C came in like he was a priest. A:
aen dis K K o and this or om in her in
wat what
a nva the river
hi he
bin d3raun PAST:AD drown
aut | asn wai | go
fom
de
him
out
from
there
and why
go
C
| a
I
neva NEG:PAST
d3raun drown pud put
no
bleim him
NEG
blame him
|
go-
for
it
| wai
wai
Ji
she asked for
it
why
why
she go
ass
wahini | hi woman he
| asn his renlein— hi— | dei and he's he they
om
Ji
wan a
And this K, K or what, he drowned a woman. He drowned her in the river. And he's rem— ne— they didn't put him out. Then why does C have to go from there. I don't blame him. She asked for it. Why— why did she go?
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
Yeah, it was wrong, but he didn't get caught. C, he got caught.
Appendix 1: Texts 183 si aen | da ga-r keim see and the girl came w^k work
in in
in in
aez wan peid3 | okas as a page okay
da kaspidol da palitijens the capitol the politicians
dei ge[t] tugo they get to ACT
brirj om— bring them
See, and the girl came in as a page. OK, they get to work in the capitol, the politicians bring them. A:
je—
Yeah B:
so
| his pad o
so
de
he's part of
Ji
neva—
if
insaigrup
the inside.group de
bin
PAST:AD bring
brirj
if
hi
neva
she NEG:PAST if
they NEG:PAST if
he
NEG:PAST allow
in
Ji
hasv
in
she wouldn't have
wuden
neva
hi he
bin
dea |
been
there
elau
om in
dea |
her in
there
om fo
kam
her COMPLEM come
So, he's part ofthe inside group. He brought her in there. She didn't— if they hadn't— if he hadn't allowed her to come in, she wouldn't have been there. A: je
| bat eh
yeah
but
ass that's
wat what
| na
eh
bat wat
Ji
but what
she PAST:AD DESID was money
bin
laik
was mani
Ji bin laik— she PAST:AD DESID
Yeah, but eh, nan, eh, but what she wanted was money, that's what she wanted. B:
asn bad—
And but A:
Ji
bin
she
PAST:AD DESID him pay her
laik
hi
pas ha^—
She wanted him to pay her. B:
da
ara
the other
hasf of
da
half of
the equation was
wz wn sinomasn was a
ikweijen wz | hi he
haed
wan
waif
| if
hi
POSS
a
wife
if
he
|
single.man
The other half of the equation was that he had a wife. If he'd been a single man.
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
B:
184
Hawai 7 Creole English
A: tek om— Take her. | hi
haed
wn waif
he
POSS
a
da baibo in
hiz hasn
i
the Bible
his hand
go
for id
go
for
it
in
wife
| asn asn
hi
waks
and and
he
walks around with
araun wi[d]
Go for it. <But> he had a wife. And— and he walks around with the Bible in his hand. A:
-laughter- |
B:
je
hi
wak
araun wi[d] da
yeah
he
walk
around with
wz atendin
sam
ekras
| hiz
den then
he's hi he
stat start
ass da kasmra as the camera ai
| laig hi
eye
like he
| aen den
funeral
and then
laefm
awas
laugh.iNTRAHF away waipin wiping Jo show ws
in
fiunerol
was attend.lNTRAHF some
across
baibo in
the Bible
krain
was cry.iNTRAHI
aen den dei and then they
de
skopin
kasmra
the camera
SCOpe.INTRA HF
asn as[s]
sun
hi
siz de
and as
soon
he
sees the camera
hiz aiz | kam his eyes come do hi though he
hiz hasn his hand
an on
gimi a breik gimme a brake
aredi already
waz kat | den hi was caught then he
bat hiz but he's
lasfin | so— laugh.lNTRAHF so
kasmra
| sun soon waip wipe
hiz his
Yeah he walks around with the Bible in his hand. They were attending some funeral and the camera was scoping across and he's laughing away, and as soon as he sees the camera, then he starts wiping his eyes. Come on, give me a break. As soon as the camera showed, even though he was already caught. Then he wipes his eyes, like he was crying, but he's laughing! So... A: B:
-tut-tuts-
|
nau nau | faesfowar now now da
da
de
eit
fast.forward the eight vaisprezden
the the vice.president
| nau hi now he
jez
diz ada
gai ranin
years
this other
guy run.lNTRAHF there's
dez
gada
tjrai
diol wid
al
das?
ASS.OBLIG
try
deal with
all
that
|
Now—now, fast forward those eight years, this other guy running, there's the—the vice president. Now he's got to deal with all that.
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
B:
Appendix I: Texts A:
nau now
hi he
hd POST
bi be
put dis ga[i] put this guy
in in
185
basdjeip nau— bad shape now
B:
hi
put diz ga[i]
in
wan—
he
put this guy
in
a
He's put this guy in a— A:
pu[d] dis ga[i]in
hat wara
nau | a ron
tin
put
this guy in
hot water
now
think
fara
no
father NEG
I don't
B wud
bi
would be
gud
da
good
the
was gud | asn wad
hi
so—wad
hi
bin
was good
he
so
he
PAST:AD learn
and what
neva
le[n]
natin
NEG:PAST
learn
nothing
what
len
hi he
|
Put this guy in hot water now. I don't think B would be good, the father wasn't good. And what's he— what has he learned, he hasn't learned anything. B:
a wud | a wud reid I would I would rate
| B
bera den C better than
|
I would— I would rate B better than C.
HOW TO CHOOSE A POI STONE (MJ75Mo) mai kupuna my kupuna
tat mi hau taught me how
tu to
pik pick
ap up
de rak the rock
fom from
da Jtrim | the stream
ji no | you know My Kupuna [Haw. senior relative] taught me how to pick the rock from the stream, you know. asn waft]
tu
luk
an
da
and what
to
look
on
the rock
rak |
And what to look for on the rock.
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
Now he's put this guy in bad shape, now.
186
Hawai 7 Creole English
asn brirj and bring
id it
horn home
| asn kip and keep
it it
|
don
wok
an
id
kip it | ji
don't
work
on
it
kip it
no
you know
antil
de
taim
is
rait | ju
until
the time
is
right
si |
you see
Don't work on it, keep it, you know, until the time is right, you see. so
in
ara
tupik ap
e
so
in
order
to pick up
the stone
de
rulin
is
| ju
the ruling is
ston
hasvtu
you
fo
|
meik
a poipaundinston | eh
COMPLEM make
a poi.pounding,stone eh
luk
Jtrim
DISASS.OBLIG look
in
de
in
the stream
|
So, in order to pick the stone to make a poi pounder stone, eh, the rule is that you have to look in the stream. de
Jtrim
is
the stream is
fri
givin
ass
wa[d]
dis kupuna
tol
mi
free
giving
that's
what
this kupuna
told
me
|
The stream is free, that's what this kupuna told me. eh
| ju you
bat nau but now
kasn AB ji you
go go
de Jtrim the stream
kasnat INAB
bikos because
asn pik and pick de there
is is
ap up
de rak the rock
aen and
wadnat whatnot
laenone | ji no | land.owner you know
Eh, you could go to the stream and chose the rock and whatnot, but now you can't, because there are land owners, eh. bifo
is
before is
fri
|
free
Before it was free. tu
re
hawaien
to
the Hawaiians
was fri
|
was free
To the Hawaiians it was free. so
dei
pik ap
is
laik de
so
they
pick up
is
like the stone
ston
ju
luk
you look
de
ston
| de
the stone
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
grein
on
the grain
on
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
And to bring it home and keep it.
Appendix 1: Texts de ston the stone
187
| ju si | you see
aen
if
ju
and
if
you see
si
| dis | kraskgrem this
grein
ranin
grain
run.INTRAHF over
de
ove
| daed | tirj
there
that
wi
thing
| wi
crack.grain
sae id— | d3es
de
we FUT
gon
say it
the
just
de
so
ji
no
if
ju
hi[d]
daet
rak
there
so
you
know
if
you
hit
that
rock
raifd] daun
|
splid
FUT split
right
down
And if you see this crack grain, we're going to say it's—just the grain running over there so you know that if you hit that rock there, that thing will split right down. so
dass
wad
ju
so
that's
what
you look.lNTRAHF
lukin
fo
an
a
for
on
the rock
rak |
So that's what you're looking for on the rock. so
wen
ju
luk
a rak
widau
da
so
when
you
look
a rock
without
the grain
saiz wat
ju
size what
you want
wan | ji
no
| aen da
you know
grein
weit
asn eritin
|
and everything
wad
and the weight what
ju
wan
asn da and the
|
you want
So when you see a rock without the grain and everything, and the size that you want, you know, and the weight that you want. so so
ji you
gon FUT
get POSS
raun Ion | wadeva | round long whatever
So, you're going to have a round, long, whatever <stone>. so so
watj what
u you
wana want.to
Jeip
laik a poiston
shaped
like a poi.stone
luk look | ji
fo for
is is
| da rak the rock
is is
oredi already
amo[s] almost
no
you know
So what you want to look for is that the rock is already almost shaped like a poi stone, you know. so
ji
so
you don't
don
wok
on
om | ah
tu
DISASS.OBLIG work
hasvtu
on
it
too much
matj
|
So you don't have to work on it, ah, too much.
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
So they chose it, it's like the stone, you look at the stone, the grain on the stone, you see.
Hawai 7 Creole English
wen ju fain when you find ada other
a a
rak rock
rak orea | rock over.there
laig like
id it
pul id pull it
aufd] out
da riva the river
aen on and on
da the
ji no | you know
When you find a rock like that take it out of the river and on the other rock over there , you know. asn te—
tel
a
and
tell
the rock
rak
|
And tell the rock: wen
ai
rita^n ail
when
I
return I'll pick
ju
pik
a poipauninston
ju
ap
| aen
you up
and
al
tek
ju
I'll
take
you home
horn
aen meik and make
|
you a poi.pounding.stone When I return I'll pick you up, and I'll take you home and make you into a poi pounding stone. aen if and if
ju haev you have
asni any
ail tek I'll teik
ju you
horn home
fai reis five days
wadeva whatever
abd3ekjen objection
| tu to
| asn ju and you
ai I
giv give
let let
war what
am duin | eh I'm doing
mi no me know
in in
daed that
| ju—| you
| fo for
reis days
ju | you
And if you have any objections to what I'm doing, eh, you— I'll take you home, and you let me know in those four days, five days, whatever I give you. ji
no
you know
am | mai pramis
ture
I'm
to the stone
my promise
ston
ass
wa[d] de
that's
what
hawaien
the Hawaiians
dan | done
You know. I'm ... my promise to the stone, that's what the Hawaiians did. ju
pur id
in
jo
ka
teig
id
horn
you put it
in
your
car take
it
home
|
You put it in your car and take it home. den
ju
then
you
| pur i? put it
| wan
pojen
of
ji
haus
a
portion
of
your
house
| ji
no
you know
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
we where
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
188
Appendix 1: Texts ful fool
eraun | liv around leave
i[d] dea | aen | wen ju liv it there and when you leave
agen
ju
eksplem tu
ra
again
you
explain
the stone
to
ston
i[d] de[a] it there
|
Then you put it in a part of your house, you know, where nobody fools around. Leave it there, and when you leave it there, again you explain to the stone: ai
gona
liv
id
he
I
FUT
leave
it
here for
fo
seven deis faiv deis wadeva jo
ra
ston
|
pomis
tu
seven days five days whatever your promise
to
the stone I'm going to leave it here for seven days, five days, whatever your promise to the stone is. aen | wen and when
das[d] dei pau that day COMPL
meikin
devil
tu
ju
make.lNTAHF
devil
to
you
if if
| o or
i[d] dazn it doesn't | sam some
kepalo kepalo
-unintelligible-
kain
witjkrasf
tu
ju
kind
witchcraft
to
you
|
And when that day has passed, if it doesn't kepalo — haunting you, or some kind of witchcraft to you... ju si das[t] tirj you see that thing okiupai areri occupied already
wi ged bask FUT get back
tu to
ju if you if
daed that
ston stone
daed that
is is
|
You see that thing will get back to you if that stone is occupied already. da
mana de
the mana
paua
in
the power in
de
ston
| eh
| hi
the stone
he
wil
kepalo
ju
FUT
kepalo
you
|
The mana the power in the stone, eh, will kepalo you. hi
wil
devil
ju
he
FUT
devil
you in
alkain
eh
in
a
nai?
the night
| eh
| giv ju give you
| sliples
d3rim asn
sleepless dream and
|
all.kind He will haunt you in the night, eh, give you sleepless dreams, and all sorts of things, eh.
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
nobadi nobody
189
190 den then
Hawai 7 Creole English ju you
no kasn PROHIB
slip sleep
den then
ju no | is e ston you know it's the stone
|
den
wen
ju
then
when
you
| ah
| natin nothing
bara
ju
den
bother you then
ju
si[d]
you sit
daun down
Then when you, ah, when nothing has bothered you then you sit down <with it>.
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
|
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
When you're not allowed to sleep , then you know, it's the stone.
1 VERB
TYPES
1 tell ('say; tell') go say come goVB make do I get I look put give take ask; try happen send see run; talk hear bring; start; teach show; stay make ('die') call; stop catch; kill fall sleep; yell grab; know; move; work chrow ('throw'); die; graduate; pick 1 get up; walk blow; dig; foget ('forget'); jump; pull; spock ('see'); tink ('think'); win 191
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
TOKENS
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 l 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 4 4 2
180 98 92 1 90 70 62 56 49 48 45 40 39 37 34 32 31 28 25 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
8
10
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
Appendix 2: Verbs Occurring with wen: Types & Tokens
VERB
broke ('break'); open; shake; touch; turn; write buy; eat; live; meet build; hit; leave; like; pass; plant; rip; sell; wait cry; figure; find; hide; learn; marry; pick up; push; show up; split; take off; wave born; burn; cut; finish; force; loose; pau (COMPletive); practice; scold; sing; smile; steal; stick; watch; wear; wipe change; check; dye; fly off; let; miss; point; press; reach; shoot; study accept; apply; bag; bless; clean; come by; fall down; feed; get out; invite; knock; lay; let go; light; make like ('pretend'); pay; play; pop; punch; remember; scatter; set; shine; stand; swear; use backfire; bang; baptize; beef ('argue'); beg; bend; blass ('blast'); bother; bounce; bury; bust out; carry; carve; close; crack; cross; disappear; draw; dry; dump; explode; feel; find out; fire; flunk; give up; grow; hang up; hemorrhage; hemu ('scare away'); hold; jam up; kick; lick; line up; listen; nab ('catch'); name; paint; poke; pound; pray; prepare; promise; quit; raise; razz ('tease'); recognize; rent; rest; ring; roll; save; scratch; ship; shut; signal; sit; slap; sqwak ('sqweak'); stand up; step; struggle; suck; swallow; swing; swipe; take out; taste; trace; warm up; whispah announce; answer; arrange; arrest; back off; bake; beat up; beat; bite; blackmail; bleed; borrow; bowl; break up; cancel; capture; cheat; choke; choose; chop; come off; concentrate; convince; cook; copy; cover; crawl; cruise; date; devil; divorce; dress up; drink up; drink; drop; earn; elect; end up; escape; evacuate; experience; explain; fence; fight; file; fish; fit; fix; float; fold; fool around; fool; grill; grow up; handle; hang around; hang; hapai ('lift onto back'); help; hope; hug; huki ('pull'); hula ('to dance the hula'); huli ('turn'); hurt; inject; join; keep (here: 'pocket'); kid; kiss; knife; knock up; laugh; lean; level; lie; look at; look up; make up; melt; misfire; murder; nod; notice; overdrive; penetrate; piss; poison; preach; put down; read; realize; recoil; return; reveal;ride;rumble; rush; saipe ('know'); serve; sew; shout; size; slide; smash; smoke; snort; space; spin; spit; spoil; start up; stuff; suffer; support; sweep; swim; transfer; trap; treat; trick; trust; turn around; unbutton; understand; untie; 1 wake up; whack; whip; worm; wrinkle
TYPES
TOKENS
6 4 9
9 8 7
12
6
16
5
11
4
26
3
72
2
149
1
A2.1 Verbs occurring with wen sorted by frequency
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
192 Hawai 7 Creole English
Adamson, L. & van Rossem, C. 1994. "Creole literature". IN: J. Arends, P. Muysken & N. Smith (eds). 75-84. Adone, D. & Vainikka, A. 1999. "Acquisition of w/2-questions in Mauritian Creole". IN M.DeGraff(ed.). 75-94. Andersen, R. W. 1990. "Papiamentu tense-aspect, with special attention to discourse". IN J. V. Singler (ed.). 59-96. Arends, J., Muysken, P. & Smith, N. (eds) 1994. Pidgins and Creoles. An Introduction. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. Baker, P. & Huber, M. 2001. "Atlantic, Pacific, and world-wide features in Englishlexicon contact languages". English World-Wide 22:2. 157-208. Bakker, D., Dahl, 6., Haspelmath, M., Koptjevskaja-Tamm, M., Lehmann, C. & Siewierska, A. 1993. EUROTYP Guidelines. MS. Bakker, P. 2003. "The absence of reduplication in pidgins". IN S. Kouwenberg (ed.): "Twice as Meaningful. Reduplication in Pidgin and Creole Languages. London: Battlebridge Publications. Balaz, J. 1998. "Lenny da loosah". IN J. Balaz: Electric Laulau. Hawai'i Dub Music. CD-track 8. Bendix, E. H. 1998. "Irrealis as category, meaning, or reference". Anthropological Linguistics 40. 245-56. Biber, D. 1986. "On the Investigation of Spoken/Written Differences". Studia Linguistica, 40:1. 1-21. Biber, D. 1988. Variation Across Speech and Writing. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Biber, D. 1994. Sociolinguistic Perspectives on Register. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Bickerton, D. 1975. Dynamics ofa Creole System. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Bickerton, D. 1977. Change and Variation in Hawaiian English. Vol. II. Creole Syntax. Final Report on National Science Foundation, Grant No. GS-39748. University of Hawaii: Social Sciences and Linguistics Institute. Bickerton, D. 1980. "Decreolization and the creole continuum". IN A. Valdman & A. Highfield (eds): Theoretical Orientations in Creole Studies. New York: Academic Press. 109-29. Bickerton, D. 1980[1974]. "Creolization, linguistic universals, natural semantax and the brain". IN R. Day (ed.): Issues in English Creoles. Heidelberg: Groos. 1-18. 193 10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
Bibliography
Bickerton, D. 1981. Roots ofLanguage. Ann Arbor: Karoma Publishers, Inc. Bickerton, D. 1987. "The language bioprogram hypothesis and second language acquisition". IN W. E. Rutherford (ed.): Language Universals and Second Language Acquisition. 2nd edn. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. 141-61. Binnick, R. I. 1991. Time and the Verb. A Guide to Tense and Aspect. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Bott, B., Bott, R. & Fennell, B. 1995. "Titas, Blalahs, and Haoles: linguistic markers of in-group/out-group status in Hawaiian ethnic humor" Essays in Arts and Sciences, Oct, 24. 77-100. Brown, P. & Levinson, S. 1987. Politeness. Some Universals in Language Usage. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Bybee, J. 1998. "'Irrealis' as a grammatical category". Anthropological Linguistics 40:2.251-71. Bybee, J., Perkins, R. & Pagliuca, W. 1994. The Evolution of Grammar. Tense, Aspect, and Modality in the Languages ofthe World. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. Carr, E. B. 1972. Da Kine Talk. From Pidgin to Standard English in Hawaii. Honolulu: The University Press of Hawaii. Chambers, J. K. & Trudgill, P. 1998. Dialectology. 2nd edn. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Chomsky, N. 1965. Aspects ofthe Theory of Syntax. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. Chomsky, N. 1975. Current Issues in Linguistic Theory. The Hague: Mouton. Chomsky, N. 1976. Syntactic Structures. The Hague: Mouton. Chomsky, N. 1993 [1981]. Lectures on Government and Binding. The Pisa Lectures. 7th ed. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter. Comrie, B. 1976. Aspect. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Comrie, B. 1985. Tense. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Comrie, B. 1989. Language Universals and Linguistic Typology. 2nd edn. Oxford: Blackwell; Chicago: University of Chicago Press. Croft, W. 1990. Typology and Universals. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Croft, W. in prep. Verbs: Aspect and Argument Structure. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Cullen, C. 1994. "Generative grammar: principles and parameters Framework". IN R. E. Asher (ed.-in-chief) & J. M. Y. Simpson (coordinating ed.): The Encyclopedia of Language and Linguistics. Vol III. Oxford: Pergamon Press. 1366-70. Da Pidgin Coup: http://www.lll.hawaii.edu/esl/pidgin.html Dahl, 6 & Velupillai, V.forthc.a. "Perfective/imperfective". IN: M. Dryer, D. Gil, M. Haspelmath & B. Comrie (eds). Dahl, O & Velupillai, V.forthc.b. "Past". IN: M. Dryer, D. Gil, M. Haspelmath & B. Comrie (eds). Dahl, O & Velupillai, V.forthc.c. "Perfect". IN: M. Dryer, D. Gil, M. Haspelmath & B. Comrie (eds).
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
194 Bibliography
Dahl, O & Velupillai, V.forthcA. "Future". IN: M. Dryer, D. Gil, M. Haspelmath & B. Comrie (eds). Dahl, O. 1984 "Temporal distance: remoteness distinctions in tense-aspect systems". IN B. Butterworth, B. Comrie & 6. Dahl (eds): Explanations for Language Universals. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter. 105-22. Dahl, 6. 1985. Tense and Aspect Systems. Oxford: Blackwell. Day, R. D. 1973. "Tense Neutralization in the Hawaiian Post-Creole Gradatum". IN C. J. N. Bailey & R. W. Shuy (eds): New Ways of Analyzing Variation in English. Washington, D.C.: Georgetown University Press. 306-12. Day, R. R. 1974. "Decreolization: Coexistent Systems and the Post-Creole Continuum; Georgetown University Round Table on Language and Linguistics 1972 (interest group session)" IN D. DeCamp & I. F. Hancock (eds): Pidgins and Creoles: Current Trends and Prospects. Washington, D.C.: Georgetown University Press. 38-45. DeGraff, M. (ed.). 1999b. Language Creation and Language Change. Creolization, Diachrony, and Development. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. DeGraff, M. 1999a. "Creolization, language change, and language acquisition: a prolegomenon". IN DeGraff 1999b. 1-46. Dryer, M., Gil, D., Haspelmath, M. & Comrie, B. (eds): World Atlas of Language Structures. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Dunn, M. 1999. A grammar of Chukchi. ANU Ph.D. Thesis. Duranti, A. 1997. Linguistic Anthropology. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Elbert, S. H. & Pukui, M. K. 1986. Hawaiian Dictionary. Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press. Elbert, S. H. & Pukui, M. K. 1979. Hawaiian Grammar. Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press. Freidin, R. 1994. "Generative grammar: principles and parameters Framework". IN R. E. Asher (ed.-in-chief) & J. M. Y. Simpson (coordinating ed.): The Encyclopedia of Language and Linguistics. VolIII. Oxford: Pergamon Press. 1370-85. Gil, D. forthc. "Escaping eurocentrism: fieldwork as a process of unlearning". IN P. Newman & M. Ratliff (eds): Linguistic Fieldwork. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Givon, T. 1982. "Tense-Aspect-Modality: the creole prototype and beyond". IN P. J. Hopper (ed.): Tense-Aspect: Between Semantics and Pragmatics. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. 115-63. Greenberg, J. H. 1974. Language Typology. A Historical and Analytical Overview. The Hague: Mouton. Greenberg, J. H., Ferguson, C. A. & Moravcsik, E. A. (eds) 1978. Universals of Human Language. Vol. I. Method & Theory. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press. Grimes, B. 1996. Ethnologue. Languages of the World. 13th ed. Dallas: Summer Institute of Linguistics, Inc.
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
Bibliography 195
Hagman, R. S. 1977. Nama Hottentot Grammar. Research Center for Language and Semiotic Studies. Bloomington: Indiana University Press. Holm, J. 1986. "Substrate diffusion". IN P. Muysken &N. Smith (eds). 259-78. Holm, J. 1988. Pidgins and Creoles. Vol. 1: Theory and Structure. Cambridge: Cambridge Univeristy Press. Huber, M. 1999. Ghanaian Pidgin English in its West African Context. A Sociohistorical and Structural Analysis. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. Johanson, L. 2000. "Viewpoint operators in European languages". IN 0. Dahl (ed.): Tense and Aspect in the Languages of Europe. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter. 27-187. Jones, W., and Jones, P. 1991. Barasano Syntax. Summer Institute of Linguistics and The University of Texas at Arlington. Kiparsky, P. 1968. "Tense and mood in Indo-European syntax". Foundations of Language 4:2. 30-57. Kuykendall, R. S. 1968. The Hawaiian Kingdom. Vol. I. 1778-1854. Foundation and Transformation. Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press. Labov, W. 1972. Sociolinguistic Patterns. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press. Labov, W. 1990[1970]. "On the adequacy of natural languages". IN J. V. Singler (ed.). 1-58. Lefebvre, C. 1998. Creole Genesis and the Acquisition of Grammar. The Case of Haitian Creole. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Lehmann, C. 1983. "Directions for interlinear morphemic translations". Folia Linguistica 16.193-224. LePage, R. B., & Tabouret-Keller, A. 1985. Acts of Identity. Creole-based Approaches to Language and Ethnicity. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Linmark, R. Z. 1995a "The eyes of Edgar Ramirez". IN: Rolling the R's. New York: Kaya Production. 41-3. Linmark, R. Z. 1995b "Vendetta". IN: Rolling the R 's. New York: Kaya Production. 73-4. Linnekin, J. 1991. "Hawaiians". IN T. E. Hays (ed.): Encyclopedia of World Cultures. II. Oceania. Boston: G. K. Hall & Co. 95-7. Lum, D. H. Y. 1980a. "Beer can hat". Bamboo Ridge. The Hawaii Writers' Quarterly 8. September-November 1980. Last Quarter. Honolulu: Bamboo Ridge Press. 10-19. Lum, D. H. Y. 1980b. "Oranges are lucky, a one-act play". Bamboo Ridge. The Hawaii Writers' Quarterly 8. September-November 1980. Last Quarter. Honolulu: Bamboo Ridge Press. 44-61. Lum, D. H. Y. 1990a. "J'like ten thousand". IN No Pass Back. Honolulu: Bamboo Ridge Press. 99-105. Lum, D. H. Y. 1990b. "No pass back". IN No Pass Back. Honolulu: Bamboo Ridge Press. 11-15. Lum, D. H. Y. 1990c. "On my honor". IN No Pass Back. Honolulu: Bamboo Ridge Press. 81-95.
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
196 Bibliography
Lum, D. H. Y. 1990d. "The Moiliili bag man". IN No Pass Back. Honolulu: Bamboo Ridge Press. 71-7. Lum, D. H. Y. 1990e. "Toads". IN No Pass Back. Honolulu: Bamboo Ridge Press. 59-67. Lum, D. H. Y. 1990f. "No Mistaking". IN No Pass Back. Honolulu: Bamboo Ridge Press. 109-24. Marantz, A. 1982. "Re: reduplication". Linguistic Inquiry 13:3. 435-82. Markey, T. L. & Fodale, P. 1980. "Lexical diathesis, focal shifts and passivization: the creole voice". Paper presented at the Third Biennial Conference, Society for Caribbean Linguistics, Aruba, September 1980. Maslov, J. S. 1988. "Resultative, Perfect and Aspect." IN V. P. Nedjalkov (ed.): Typology of Resultative Constructions. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. 63-85. Masuda, H. 2000. The Genesis of Discourse Grammar. Universals and Substrata in Guyanese, Hawaii Creole, and Japanese. New York: Peter Lang. Matthew Tell Bout Jesus. Hawaii Pidgin Style. 1997. New York: American Bible Society. McWhorter, J. 1997. Towards a New Model of Creole Genesis. New York: Peter Lang. McWhorter, J. 1998. "Identifying the creole prototype: vindicating a typological class". Language 74:4. 788-818. Meyerhoff, M. 2000. Constraints on Null Subjects in Bislama (Vanuatu): Social and Linguistic Factors. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics. Michaelis, S. 1994. Komplexe Syntax im Seychellen-Kreol. Tubingen: Gunter Narr Verlag. Milroy, J & Milroy, L (eds) 1993. Real English. The Grammar of English Dialects in the British Isles. London: Longman. Mufwene, S. 1990. "Time reference in Kikongo-Kituba". IN J. V. Singler (ed.). 97-117. Mufwene, S. 2001. The Ecology of Language Evolution. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Muysken, P. & Smith, N. (eds) 1986. Substrata Versus Universals in Creole Genesis. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. Muysken, P. & Smith, N. 1994. "The study of pidgin and creole languages". IN J. Arends, P. Muysken, & N. Smith, (eds). 3-14. Muysken, P. 1988. "Are Creoles a special type of language?" IN F. J. Newmeyer (ed.): Linguistics: The Cambridge Survey. Vol. II. Linguistic Theory: Extensions and Implications. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. 285-301. Odo, C. 1975. Phonological Processes in the English Dialect of Hawaii. Dissertation, University of Hawai'i at Manoa. MS. Oribio, N. 1999a. Alien. MS. Oribio, N. \999b Lion-Gau. MS. Palmer, F. R. 1986. Mood and Modality. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Palmer, F. R. 2001. Mood and Modality. 2nd edn. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Roberts, J. M. 1995. "Pidgin Hawaiian: A sociohistorical study". Journal of Pidgin and Creole Languages 10:1. 1-56.
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
Bibliography 197
Roberts, S. J. 1997. "Nativization and the genesis of Hawaiian Creole". MS. Roberts, S. J. 1998a. "The role of diffusion in the genesis of Hawaiian Creole". Language 74. 1-39. Roberts, S. J. 1998b. "Olla Podrida: Language mixing, pidgins, and creolizations". Paper given at the SPCL Annual Meeting, New York, 1 September 1998. Roberts, S. J. 1999. "The TMA system of Hawaiian Creole and diffusion". IN J. Rickford & S. Romaine (eds): Creole Genesis, Attitude and Discourse. Studies Celebrating Charlene J. Sato. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. 45-70. Romaine, S. 1988. Pidgin and Creole Languages. London: Longman. Romaine, S. 1994a. "Hawai'i Creole English as a literary language". Language in Society 23. 527-54. Romaine, S. 1994b. "Hau fo rait pijin: writing in Hawai'i Creole English" English Today 38. 20-4. Romaine, S. 1996. "Pidgins and Creoles as Literary Languages: Ausbau and Abstand" IN M. Hellinger & U. Ammon (eds): Contrastive Sociolinguistics. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter. 271-89. Romero-Figueroa, A. 1997. A Reference Grammar ofWarao. Munich: Lincom Europa. Ryan, E. B. 1979. "Why Do Low-Prestige Language Varieties Persist?" IN H. Giles, R. N. St. Clair, P. Trudgill, W. Labov & R. Fasold (eds): Language and Social Psychology. Baltimore: University Park Press. 145-57. Sakamoto, E. 1980. Aala Park. Monterey Park. MS. Sakamoto, E. 1982. Manoa Valley. MS. Sakamoto, E. 1988. Stew Rice. MS. Sakamoto, E. 1992. Aloha Las Vegas. MS. Sato, C. J. 1978. Variation in Hawaiian Pidgin and Creole English: go + verb Constructions. M.A. thesis, University of Hawai'i at Manoa, MS. Sato, C. J. 1985 "Linguistic inequality in Hawaii: the post-creole dilemma". IN J. Manes & N. Wolfson (eds): Language and Inequality. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter. 256-72. Sato, C. J. 1993. "Language change in a creole continuum: decreolization?" IN K. Hyltenstam & A. Viberg (eds): Progression and Regression in Language: Sociocultural, Neuropsychological, and Linguistic Perspectives. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. 122-44. Schieffelin, B. B. 1996. "Creating evidence: making sense of written words in Bosavi". IN E. Ochs, E. A. Schegloff & S. A. Thompson (eds): Interaction and Grammar. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. 435-60. Sebba, M. & Wootton, T. 1998. "We, They and Identity: Sequential versus Identity-Related Explanation in Code-Switching" IN P. Auer (ed.): Code-Switching in Conversation: Language, Interaction and Identity. London: Routledge. 262-86. Shnukal, A. 1998. Broken. An Introduction to the Creole Language of Torres Strait. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
198 Bibliography
Siegel, J. 2000. "Substrate influence in Hawai'i Creole English". Language in Society 29:2. 197-236. Silva, I. S. 1990. 'Tense and aspect in Capeverdean Crioulo". IN J. V. Singler (ed.). 143-68. Singler, J. V. (ed.). 1990b. Pidgin and Creole Tense-Mood-Aspect Systems. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. Singler, J. V. 1990a. "On the use of sociohistorical criteria in the comparison of Creoles" Linguistics 28. 645-59. Smith, N. 1994. "An annotated list of Creoles, pidgins, and mixed languages" IN J. Arends, P. Muysken & N. Smith (eds). 331-74. Spears, A. K. 1990. "Tense, mood, and aspect in the Haitian Creole preverbal marker system". IN J. V. Singler (ed.). 119-42. Thomason, S. G. & Kaufman, T. 1988. Language Contact, Creolization, and Genetic Linguistics. Berkeley: University of California Press. Thompson, R. W. 1961. "A note on some possible affinities between the creole dialects ofthe old world and those ofthe new". IN R. B. Le Page (ed.): Proceedings ofthe Conference on Creole Language Studies. London: Macmillan. 107-13. Tsuzaki, S. M. 1971. "Coexistent systems in language variation. The case of Hawaiian English". IN D. Hymes (ed.): Pidginization and Creolization of Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. 327-39. van der Auwera, J. & Ammann, A. forthc.z. "Situational modality". IN: M. Dryer, D. Gil, M. Haspelmath & B. Comrie (eds). van der Auwera, J. & Ammann, A. forthc.b. "Epistemic modality". IN: M. Dryer, D. Gil, M. Haspelmath & B. Comrie (eds). van der Auwera, J. & Ammann, A.forthc.c. "Overlap between situational and epistemic modality". IN: B. M. Dryer, D. Gil, M. Haspelmath & B. Comrie (eds). Velupillai, V. 2003. "The absence of reduplication in Hawai'i Creole English". IN S. Kouwenberg (ed.): Twice as Meaningful. Reduplication in Pidgin and Creole Languages. London: Battlebridge Publications. Whinnom, K. 1965. "Contacts de langues et emprunts lexicaux: The Origin of the European-based Creoles and Pidgins". Orbis 14. 509-27. Winford, D. 1996. "Common ground and creole TMA". Journal of Pidgin and Creole Languages 11:1. 71-84. Yamanaka, L.-A. 1993. Saturday Night at the Pahala Theatre. Honolulu: Bamboo Ridge Press. Yamanaka, L.-A. 1996. Wild Meat and the Bully Burgers. New York: Farrar Straus Giroux. Yamanaka, L.-A. 1999. Heads by Harry. New York: Farrar Straus Giroux.
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
Bibliography 199
A ABilitive 42 ABility xi, 34, 42, 48-9, 58, 64, 76, 79,89, 110,112-16, 130,133, 138, 150-1, 155, 165, 167, 171, 173, 177-8, 186, 188 Absolute tense 8-9, 32-3, 45, 52, 71, 106, 139 Acquisition 194-5 Acrolect 30, 160 Action marker xi, 4-5, 9, 11, 15, 18, 36-9,41-2,45,51,59-61,67,71, 74-5,79-80,86,93,97, 112, 114, 125-6, 132, 141, 143-5, 147-50, 157-8, 163, 172, 174, 176, 178, 183,196 Action verb 4, 157 Actionality 36-9, 74-5, 77, 79, 99, 106, 143, 147 Finitransformative 37 SERiality xiii, 38-9 Transformativity 37-40, 73, 143 Adjective 7 ADMONitive xi, 10, 41, 110, 125, 133, 150, 155 ADterminal x-xi, 9, 36, 39-40, 48, 53,60-1,63,70-8,80-1,98-9, 103-4, 110-15, 126-7, 129-30, 132, 138, 141-2, 144-5, 148, 1523, 158, 163-6, 169-70, 172, 1756, 179-80, 182-3, 185
Adverbial 5,63,95,158 Agent 41,44,120,132, 149 Ancestor 6, 14-15 ANTerior x, xi, 4-5, 9, 70-1, 73, 106, 157-9 Aowe 150 Argument 136 Article 7 Definite 7 Indefinite 7 Aspect ix, 4, 7, 9, 19, 30, 33, 36, 38-40, 42-3, 53, 61, 66-7, 70, 735, 77-8, 82, 91, 96, 99-100, 1035, 137-8, 140-7, 153-4, 156-9, 193, 195, 199 ADterminal x-xi, 9, 36, 39-40, 48, 53, 60-1, 63, 70-8, 80-1, 98-9, 103-4, 110-15, 126-7, 129-30, 132, 138, 141-2, 1445, 148, 152-3, 158, 163-6, 16970, 172, 175-6, 179-80, 18283, 185 COMPLetive xi, 5, 9, 40, 70, 73, 75,81,97,99,105,144,148, 152-3, 158, 192 CONTinuous xi, 68, 82, 84-6, 104, 146, 152-3 HABitual xii, 9, 35, 43, 52, 61, 66,70,82,84-6,95-7, 104-5, 114, 129, 138,141, 146-8, 152-3, 158, 167-8, 170, 173-4, 176 Imperfective 104, 145, 153, 194
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
General Index
General Index
B Background 5, 8, 12 Base form 4-6, 9, 33-4, 45-9, 51-4, 65,67-8,71,73,96,99, 110-11, 124, 138-9, 144, 147, 149, 154-5, 158 Basilect 160 Bias 15 Bilingual 14 Bimorphemic 7 Bounded 36, 38, 78-9 bumbye 9,21,45,62-3,67,69, 136, 138, 140, 154, 156, 158, 160
c Camcorder 27 Category 1, 5, 8-10, 15, 17-18, 22, 28-30,32-3,36,38,41-3,45,67, 73,75,82,102-5,109, 136-40, 146-9, 151-5, 157-8, 160, 162-3, 193-4,216 Causality 106 Change 15, 34, 38, 40, 47, 92, 107, 117, 155, 160, 192,195, 198 Character 11 Characteristic 37, 95, 97, 161 Clause 157 Code 28, 30, 73, 163 Cognate 69 Colloquial 67, 154 Combinability 145 Combination 11, 28, 36, 39, 43, 63, 87, 100-1, 156 Combine 3, 27, 36, 61-2, 89, 97, 99, 141-3, 145, 148, 157 Command 41, 111, 133, 149, 158 Commissive 41-2 Common 1-3, 7, 13-14, 24, 33, 54, 64,66-8,87,95, 104, 115,125, 127, 132, 138-41, 145, 148-9, 151-2, 154, 156, 161-2 Communication 14,17,112 Community 11,24, 156 Completed 40, 73, 76, 97-9, 112, 143-4, 148 COMPLetive xi, 5, 9, 40, 70, 73, 75, 81,97-9, 105, 117, 138,144, 148, 152-3, 158, 169, 171, 189, 192 Component xi Conclusion 2, 4, 11, 41, 73, 77, 94, 118,149,162 CONDitional xi, 110, 123-4, 133, 138, 150, 155, 157, 159
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
INTRAterminal 9, 39, 70, 82, 94, 104, 138, 145-6, 153, 158 Nonpunctual 4, 5, 39, 84, 157, 158 Perfective 104, 145, 153 POSTterminal x, xiii, 5, 9, 36, 40, 99-102, 104, 137-8, 142, 147, 153, 156, 158, 169-72, 182, 185, 198 PROGressive xiii, 5, 82, 86, 90-2, 104, 146, 153 Punctual 39, 73, 75 RESULTative xiii, 33, 37, 40, 73, 75-6,99,121, 143-4,147,156 Associative xi, 10, 110, 120-1, 123, 133, 149-50, 158 Associative OBLlGation xi, 10,34, 51,54,59,61,75,93, 110,116, 119-22, 130, 138,155, 158,175, 184 Attainment 39, 74, 80 Attitude 16,41, 124, 150 Audience 20,22, 109, 156 Author 10,28,118, 124-5 Auxiliary 55, 148
2 01
General Index
Conform 10, 136, 139-41, 146-9, 152, 158-9, 162 Consistency 10, 33, 117, 125, 151, 154 Construction 9, 10, 16, 18-21, 24, 42-3, 53-4, 56, 59-62, 67, 70-3, 75-8,80-1,83,85-7,89,91-6,99, 102, 104-5, 110-11, 119-20, 1235, 127, 133, 138, 140-1, 144, 1467, 149-50, 152-5,158,172,213 Contact 4, 13, 22, 136, 155-6, 160, 193 Contemporary 1, 14, 127, 136-8, 158, 160 Context 3, 6, 14-15, 17, 22-3, 27-9, 33, 40, 45, 52, 60, 66-7, 75, 7780,87,89,91,93,99, 101-2, 10912,117, 119,125, 132, 134-5, 139, 144, 147 CONTinuous xi, 68, 82, 84-6, 104, 146, 152-3 Continuum 193, 198 Convention 11, 18 Convergence 19, 152, 155 Conversation 20, 22, 47, 89, 106, 109 Cook, Captain 78, 106, 119, 134, 192 Coordinating 194-5 Copula 7,9,34,45,47,51-2,55, 64-5, 67, 90 Locative xii, 7, 23, 34, 45, 49, 54,64,66,68,93, 168, 170, 181 Zero 7 Core 82, 145, 159 Creole 1-3, 6-11, 19, 26, 32, 67, 69, 70, 103, 136-7, 152, 157, 159-60, 193, 195, 197-9 Genesis 1, 6, 11, 136, 198
Creolization 7, 11 Criteria 3,6,78,106, 148, 199 Crosslinguistic ix, 1-2, 10-11,32, 67, 104-5, 133, 138-41, 147, 149, 151-2, 161-2 Crucial limit 37, 39, 73-5, 77-8, 80, 104, 143-5 Culmination 37-8, 75 Current 39 Cursus 37, 40, 142
D Data 2, 8, 10, 14-20, 24, 26-9, 32, 37, 62, 68-9, 75, 77, 84, 87, 92, 101,104,110,117,135-9,141, 147, 149, 152, 155, 157, 159-60 Oral 8,21 Spoken 8, 18,20,87, 118 Writtem 19, 62, 69, 99, 124, 135 Database 8, 10, 18, 22, 25, 27-8, 31,55,59,62,77,79-80,84-5, 87,93,95,99, 105, 112, 115, 117, 124, 127, 133, 135, 140-1, 145-7 Day,R.R. 19,21,48,57,95,97, 131, 173, 175, 189 Declarative 7 Decreolization 10, 136, 160, 198 Deduct xi, 127, 130-1, 138, 155 Deductive xi, 10,41-2, 110, 128, 130, 133, 149-51, 154, 158 DEDUCTive JUDgement 128,130, 149, 151, 154, 158 Default 15 Definite article 7 Deictic centre xii, 38, 73-4, 100-1, 104, 144-5, 147 Demand 13 Demographic 156
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
202
Deontic 9, 41-2, 44, 110, 116, 120, 125, 133, 149-50, 154, 158 DESlDerative xi, 10, 23, 61, 81, 90, 98, 110,117, 132-3,138, 152, 155, 159, 172, 176, 178-9, 183 Develop 4,6, 11, 14-15,24-5, 1567 Development 5, 14, 38, 118, 137 Deviation 8 Diachronic 5, 136-7 Dialect 156-7, 199 Dialogue 17-18,21,31,47,59,66, 84, 88-9, 94, 163 Differentiate 19,69, 119, 153 Diffusion 6, 196, 198 Dimension 8 Direct 22,75, 133, 149, 152, 155, 158 Directive 41-2, 110, 112, 116, 120, 123, 125, 133, 149-50 DiSASSociative xi, 10, 50, 110, 120, 122-3, 133, 138, 150, 155, 158, 175 Discourse 47, 193 Diverge 106, 156 Diversity 14 Domain 6, 11, 24, 64, 67, 104, 118, 151, 156-7 Drama 17-18,88-9 Dual 9 Duration 37-9, 82, 142-3 Durative 39,73,75, 157 Dynamic 19,22,38,40-2,44,74-5, 77-9,110, 112,116,133,149-50
E Education 4, 13 Elicitation 16-17,20,22,27,63,801,89,93-4,109,111,116,156 Emigration 30
203
End 83, 142 Endpoint 83, 142 Entry 216 Environment 14,25,27 Epistemic 9,41-2, 110, 127, 133, 148, 151, 154-5, 158, 162, 199 Equipment 17, 20, 27, 30, 109 Ethnicity 8, 10, 14, 24-5, 28, 30-1, 117, 133,137, 156-7, 194,216 Interethnic 14 Event 9, 32-3, 36-2, 45, 49, 52, 55, 58-60, 67, 70-80, 82, 84-6, 91-4, 97-101, 104-6, 123-4, 131, 13944, 146, 148-51, 154, 158, 162-3 Subevent 38, 106 Evidential 41-2, 148 Examination 30 Exclamation xii EXlSTential xii, 7, 24, 36, 54, 71, 102, 120, 130, 137, 150, 163-4, 167, 170, 174-5, 178, 181 External factors 41-2, 123, 150 Eyewitnessing 42, 148
F Factors External 41-2, 123, 150 Internal 41-2 Female 29, 157 Fieldwork 15-16,18,31,195 Final point 37, 40, 74, 100, 142-4, 148 Finding 10,95,136-7, 139, 149, 159 Finis 37,40,100, 142-4, 148 Finitransformative 37 Focality xii, 9, 23, 38-9, 70, 82-3, 89, 91, 94, 99, 104, 145, 147 IMMediate now x, xii, 87, 91, 94, 104
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
General Index
General Index
NonFocality 38, 82, 146 Foreground 92, 146 Foreign 13, 64 Foreigner 13, 62, 156 Foreman 13 Framework 8, 11, 15, 17, 32, 36, 44-5,70, 109,139, 141-2, 148-9 Free morpheme 7 Free speech 20 Frequency ix, 87, 89, 156, 192 Function 9, 17, 22, 24, 39, 76, 78-9, 100, 110, 133,151, 159-60 FUTure xii, 5, 9,21, 24, 33, 45-6, 49, 50, 53, 55-67, 89, 90, 95, 1.001, 118-20, 125,136, 138-41, 147, 154, 156-8, 160, 165, 173, 175, 177, 187, 189 REMote xiii, 9, 26, 33, 63, 66-7, 95-6, 136, 138, 140-1, 154, 173, 175, 182
G gaDa VERB 34, 184 Gender 8, 10,28-9,137,157,216 Generation 11, 14, 57, 129, 155 Generative 2, 11 Generic 139 Genesis 1, 6, 11, 136, 198 Genre x, 87-9 Geographic 8-9, 14, 24-5, 30, 62, 64, 117, 137, 156-8 GERund xii Gesture 15,27, 157 Global 2, 38, 106, 136, 138, 145-6, 162 Gloss 43, 74, 97 go(i)n(g)/gonna VERB 45, 56-7, 59,67, 138, 140,154,158
gotta/gadaVERB 21,92, 110, 11819, 120, 122-3, 133, 138, 149-50, 154-5 Grammar 3, 6, 11, 69, 156-7, 194-5 Grammatical 1, 3, 5, 15, 20, 29, 323,43,52,63,67,100,104,10910, 136, 140-1, 146-7, 154-5, 157-8, 162, 194 Grammaticalization 62, 141, 156 Green, L. 85-6,93, 108 Grounding 5, 8, 12, 89, 91-2, 104, 146 Background 5, 8, 12 Foreground 92, 146 Group session xi, 20, 195 Guideline 75 Gustafsson, D. xi, 113
H HABitual xii, 9, 35, 43, 52, 61, 66, 70,82,84-6,95-7, 104-5, 114, 129, 138, 141, 146-8, 152-3, 158, 167-8, 170, 173-4, 176 Haole 13-14, 18,25, 128, 135 Haole-Yikz 18,135 haolified 135 Hawai'i 30, 194 Hawaii Creole English 45, 70, 139 History 11,43,156 Hearer 22,41, 113, 115,149-50, 156 Hearsay 42, 148 Heterogenized 38 High Focality x, xii, 23, 38, 70, 823, 104, 146 Highlight 37-8, 74-5, 77-9, 81, 107, 131, 145, 148 Homogenization 38 Homogenized 38 Homogenous 38
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
204
Homophonous 76
I Identity 15,18,24,30,31 IMMediate now x, xii, 87, 91, 94, 104 Immigrant 14 Immigration 156 IMPERative xii, 8, 10, 41-2, 61, 67, 109-11,132,138, 141,149,155, 158 Imperfective 104, 145, 153, 194 INABility xii, 9, 24, 48, 110, 116-19, 132-4, 138, 149-50, 155-6, 159, 170, 186 Indefinite article 7 Inflection 3, 52, 140 Informant xiv, 10, 16, 18-20, 22-3, 25,27-8,30-31,55-6,58,63,76, 80-1,89,93-4,111, 116,119, 125, 130, 134, 141, 145, 155, 157,216 Inherent 39, 53, 99, 102, 139, 143, 145, 147 Initiotransformative 37 Initium 37,40,74,77,80, 106, 142-5 iNTENSive xii, 13,83, 137 Interethnic 14 iNTERJection xii, 48, 61 Interlinearization xi, 196 Internal factors 41-2 Interview 16, 20, 27-30, 102, 11719 Interview session 20, 27 INTRAterminal x, xii, 9, 23, 36, 39, 70,82-4,89,91,94,104,138, 142, 145-6, 153, 158
205
High Focality 48, 55, 61, 70, 76, 90-91, 138, 153, 164-70, 173, 178, 181-2, 184, 187 High Focality IMMediate now 91, 93, 138, 153 LOW Focality 70, 138, 153, 158, 169, 173 iRRealis xii, 4-5, 9, 157-8 Iterative 157
J JUDgement xii, 10, 41-2, 76, 99, 110,127-31,133, 138,148, 151, 154-5, 158 DEDUCTive 128, 130, 149, 151, 154,158 SPECULative xiii, 10, 41-2, 76, 110,127-30,133,138,151, 154-5, 158
K Kupuna 149
L Labour 13-14,30, 172 Language Elicited 16-17,20,22,27,63, 80-81,89,93-4, 109, 111, 116, 156 Naturalistic 16-17, 19-20, 118, 156 Performed 17, 109 Questionnaire 17, 110 Spoken 10, 17-20,22,28,55, 85,93, 110, 119, 151-2, 156 Written 10, 17-18,22,30,88, 93,109-10, 117,119,133, 150, 156
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
General Index
General Index
Language Bioprogram Hypothesis xii, 4, 7-8, 10, 136, 152, 157-60, 194 Lexeme 40 Lexified 69 Limit Crucial 37, 39, 73-5, 77-8, 80, 104, 143-5 Lingua franca 13 Listener 106, 110, 128 Literacy 13, 18,30, 198 Literarization 30 Localization point 73-4, 144 LOCative xii, 7, 23, 34, 45, 49, 54, 64,66,68,93, 168, 170, 181 LOW Focality x, xii, 38, 70, 82-3, 104, 146 Luna 13
M Mainland 55, 128 Male 29, 157 Menehune 65, 163, 167, 169-72 Minidisk xii Minority 149 Missionary 13 Modal 9, 42, 49, 55-6, 58-61, 66, 110, 116, 132, 140, 148,150, 152, 154, 158-9 Modality ix, 7, 9, 40-2, 47, 61, 667, 109, 137-8, 140-41, 148-9, 151-2, 154-5, 158-9, 162, 199 ABility xi, 34, 42, 48-9, 58, 64, 76,79,89,110,112-16,130, 133, 138, 150-1, 155, 165, 167, 171, 173, 177-8, 186, 188 Associative OBLlGation xi, 10, 34,51,54,59,61,75,93, 110, 116,119-22, 130,138,155, 158, 175, 184
CONDtitional xi, 110, 123, 133, 150, 157, 159 DEDUCTive JUDgement 128,130, 149, 151, 154, 158 Deontic 9,41-2,44,110, 116, 120, 125, 133, 149-50, 154, 158 DESlDerative xi, 10, 23, 61, 81, 90,98, 110, 117, 132-3,138, 152, 155, 159, 172, 176, 1789,183 Directive 41-2, 110, 112, 116, 120, 123, 125, 133, 149-50 DiSASSociative OBLlGation xi, 10, 50, 110, 120, 122-3, 133, 138, 150, 155, 158, 175 Dynamic 19,22,38,41-2,44, 74-5,77.9,110,112,116,133, 149-50 Epistemic 9,41-2, 110, 127, 133, 148, 151, 154-5, 158, 162, 199 Event 9, 32-3, 36-42, 45, 52, 56, 59-60,67,70-1,73-80,82,846,91-4,97-101, 104-5,123, 139-40, 142-4, 146, 148-51, 154, 158, 162-3 Evidential 41-2, 148 IMPERative xii, 8, 10, 41-2, 61, 67, 109-11, 132, 138, 141, 149, 155, 158 INABility xii, 9, 24, 48, 110, 11619, 132-4, 138, 149-50, 155-6, 159, 170, 186 iRRealis xii, 4-5, 9, 157-8 JUDgement xii, 10, 41-2, 76, 99, 110, 127-31, 133, 138, 148, 151, 154-5, 158 OBLlGation xii, 10, 34, 41-2, 501,54,59,61,93, 110, 116,
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
206
119-24, 128, 130,133,138, 149, 150-1, 154-5, 158, 175, 184 PERMissive xiii, 112, 115, 138, 150-1, 154-5 POLite REQuest 43, 111 PROHlBitive xiii, 9, 35, 50, 110, 116-19, 133, 138, 150-1, 1556, 159, 170, 179, 190 Propositional 9, 40, 42, 148, 154,158 REQuest xiii, 10,43, 109-12, 125, 132, 138, 149, 155, 158 REQuest, POLite 43, 111 SPECULative JUDgement xiii, 10, 41-2,76, 110, 127-30, 133, 138, 151, 154-5, 158 Volitive 42 Modifier 106 Momentaneous xii, 37 Mood 4,9,61, 157-8,196, 199 Necessity 2, 8, 120, 154 POSSiBility 18,30,42,56,59,67, 112, 123, 129, 141, 154-5 Morpheme Free 7 Morphemic 196 Morphological component xi MOTion verb xii, 59, 141 Movement rule 7
N Narrative 9, 16, 18, 33, 45, 52, 65, 67-8, 77-8, 87, 89, 91-2, 96, 1046, 110, 139, 141,144,146-7,1534, 163 Narrator 55-6, 62-3, 78-9, 84, 92, 114-15,118, 122-4,128,132,135 Naturalistic language 16,17,19-20, 118, 156
207
Naturalistic speech 20 Necessity 2,8,120, 154 NEGated PAST 9, 45, 54-5, 140 NEGation xii, 7, 19, 74, 79, 110, 133, 145, 150, 159 Neutralization 5 neva VERB 9, 45, 54-5, 67, 71, 75, 80, 140 NonFocality 38, 82, 146 Nonpast 4, 157 Nonpunctual 4-5, 39, 84, 157-8 Nunc 145-6
o OBLlGation xii, 10, 34, 41-2, 50-1, 54,59,61,93,110, 116,119-24, 128, 130, 133, 138, 149-51, 1545, 158, 175, 184 Associative xi, 10, 34, 51, 54, 59,61,75,93, 110,116,11922, 130, 138, 155, 158, 175, 184 DiSASSociative xi, 10, 50, 110, 120, 122-3, 133, 138, 150, 155, 158, 175 Obligatoriness 5, 10, 45, 47, 50-3, 65,67,73,77,90,95-6,105,110, 139, 152, 154-5, 160 Oral 8,21 Orientation point x, 39-40, 73, 82, 100-2, 104, 147
P Paradox 30 Participation 15 Participle 142 PAST x, xiii, 4-5, 9, 32-4, 39, 43, 45-6, 48, 50, 52-5, 60-1, 64-7, 707,80-1,86-7,89-91,95-105, 112,
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
General Index
General Index
114-15, 119-20, 123-4,126-7, 129-33, 135, 138, 140-2, 144, 147-8, 150, 152-4, 157-8, 163-4, 166-70, 172-6, 178-83, 185 Past-before-past 70, 77, 157 pau 5,9,70,81,97-9,105,138, 148, 152-3, 158, 192 PerFeCT xiii, 27, 37, 44, 48, 100-2, 106, 142, 147, 153 Perfective 104, 145, 153 Performed language 17,109 PERMissive xiii, 112, 115, 138, 1501, 154-5 Phonological 69 Pidgin 4,7,11,30,69-70, 159, 193, 194, 197-9 Pidginized 14 Plantation 13-14, 30, 62, 64, 124, 134 PLuPerFeCT xiii, 27, 100, 142, 147, 153 Plural 65, 157 POLite REQuest 43, 111 Politeness xiii, 16,43, 110-11, 125, 149, 162 Portmanteau 9, 53, 61, 70, 74, 95, 97, 105, 142, 144, 147, 154, 158 Positive 9, 19, 110, 133 possessive xiii, 7, 46, 56, 58, 72, 81,95,98,101-3, 114,120, 164, 166, 173-4, 177, 181, 183-4, 187 POSSlBility 155 POSTterminal x, xiii, 5, 9, 36, 40, 99-102, 104, 137-8, 142, 147, 153, 156, 158, 169-72, 182, 185, 198 Postverbal 159 PRESent 1, 6, 8, 14, 20, 32-3, 39, 45-6, 49-52, 55, 62, 64-5, 67-8,
82,89-91,95,98,100, 129, 13740, 147, 149, 152-4, 160 Prestige 13, 15,22 Preverbal 4,7, 159, 199 PROGressive xiii, 5, 82, 86, 90-2, 104, 146, 153 PROHlBitive xiii, 9, 35, 50, 110, 116-19, 133,138,150-1,155-6, 159, 170, 179, 190 Pronoun 66 Propositional 9, 40, 42, 148, 154, 158 Prototype 137, 158, 195, 197 Proximity 8, 33 Punctual 39, 73, 75
Q Question words 7 Questionnaire 16-17, 19,30, 110, 118
R Recording session 20 Reduplication 103, 193, 197, 199 Reference point 5, 9, 10, 22, 32-4, 36,43,46,50,52,54,59-61,65, 67, 70-2, 74-5, 77-8, 89-91, 95-6, 104, 106, 123, 129, 139, 141, 144, 147, 150, 154, 193, 197 Register 8, 14, 17, 20, 30, 109, 117, 137, 151, 156-7 Relative xiii, 46, 138, 154 Relativization 7 REMote xiii, 9, 26, 33, 63, 66-7, 956, 136, 138, 140-1, 154, 173, 175, 182 REMote FUTure xiii, 9, 26, 33, 63, 66-7,95-6,136,138, 140-1,154, 173, 175, 182
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
208
Remoteness 45, 62-3, 95, 105, 13941, 147, 154, 158, 195 Reported speech xiv, 47-8, 106, 139 REQuest xiii, 10,43, 109-12, 125, 132, 138, 149, 155, 158 REQuest, POLite 43, 111 Restructuring 14, 30 RESULTative xiii, 33, 37, 40, 73, 756,99,121,143-4, 147,156
s -s form 2,4,7,17,28,43,49,71, 77,93, 108, 114, 138,154 Sampling 8, 109, 118, 151, 157 Scope 21,44,47,80-1,99,152, 156-7, 162, 184 Semantic 8, 56 Sequential 38 SERiality xiii, 38-9 Session Group xi, 20, 195 Interview 20, 27 Recording 20 Setting Temporal 138-9 Settlement 14,26,64 Simple past 4,53,73,147,157 Simultaneous 9, 32-5, 46, 52, 67-8, 71,90, 129, 131,139, 159 Speaker 10, 12, 14, 17, 19,20-2, 24-6, 28, 30, 33-4, 40-2, 44, 46-9, 51,56-61,63-7,69,71-2,79,83, 85-6,91,95-9,101-2, 112-17, 119-20, 122-9,132-4, 141, 14851, 154, 156-8, 160, 163 SPECULative xiii, 10,41-2, 76, 110, 127-30, 133, 138, 151, 154-5, 158 Speech Free 20
209
Naturalistic 20 Reported xiv, 47-8, 106, 139 Speech moment 9, 37 Spoken data 8, 18, 20, 87, 118 Spoken language 10, 17-20, 22, 28, 55,85,93,110,119,151-2, 156 Stabilization 14 Standard English 19, 53, 72, 99, 110-11,142,154,173 State verbs 4, 157 STATIVE 22, 70, 74, 77-9, 97
Stigmatization 16, 22 Stratum 39, 60, 62, 82, 100, 142, 145, 147 Subevent 38, 106 Subjunctive 157 Substrate 3,6, 14,25, 137 Superstrate 6-8, 18, 25, 27, 152 Synchronic 1, 136-7, 155, 160 Syntax 196
T Tabouret-Keller, A. 8, 24, 196 Telic 75 Temporal setting 138-9 Temporality 5, 9, 33-4, 37, 39, 45, 51-2,59-60,62,65,67,78,82, 96, 99-100, 104-5, 138-45, 147, 153, 158 Tense ix-x, 4-5, 7-9, 19, 30, 32-4, 36-7, 43, 45, 48-9, 52, 55-6, 60-2, 64-71,95-6,100, 102,106, 123, 129, 135, 137-42, 147, 152-4, 156-9, 193, 195 Absolute 8-9,32-3,45,52,71, 106, 139 ANTerior x-xi, 4-5, 9, 70-1, 73, 106, 157-9 Base form 4-5, 9, 33-4, 45-9, 514,65,67-8,71,73,96,111,
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
General Index
General Index
138-9, 144, 147, 149, 154-5, 158 FUTure xii, 5, 9, 21, 24, 33, 45-6, 49-50, 53, 55-67, 89-90, 95, 100-1, 118-20, 125, 136, 13841, 147, 154, 156-8, 160, 165, 173, 175, 177, 187, 189 NEGated PAST 9, 45, 54-5, 140
Nonpast 4, 157 PAST x, xiii, 4-5, 9, 32-4, 39, 43,
45-6,48,50,52-5,60-1,64-7, 70-7,80-1,86-7,89-91,95101, 103-5, 112, 114-15, 11920, 123-4, 126-7, 129-33, 135, 138, 140-2, 144, 147-8, 150, 152-4, 157-8, 163-4, 166-70, 172-6, 178-83, 185 Past-before-past 70, 77, 157 PerFeCT xiii, 27, 37, 44, 48, 1002, 106, 142, 147, 153 PLuPerFeCT xiii, 27, 100, 142, 147, 153 PRESent 1, 6, 8, 14, 20, 32-3, 39, 45-6, 49-52, 55, 62, 64, 65, 678,82,89-91,95,98, 100, 129, 137-40, 147, 149, 152-4, 160 REMote FUTure xiii, 9, 26, 33, 63, 66-7,95-6, 136, 138, 140-1, 154, 173, 175, 182 -s form 2,4,7,17,28,43,49, 71,77,93, 108,114,138, 154 Simple past 4, 53, 73, 147, 157 Terminum 39, 73 Transcription 11 Transformative Fini- 37 Transformative Initio- 37 Transformativity 37-40, 73, 143
Typological 1, 3, 8, 141, 145, 148, 160, 197 Typology 1-2
u Ungrammatical 16,51,74-5,80, 145 Universal 1-2, 6, 11, 15, 193 Unreal time 157
V Variation 2, 4, 7-9, 14, 16, 18-22, 24-6,30,39,62,68,72-3,10910, 117-18, 125, 133, 136-7, 150, 152, 155-60, 199 Age 8,10,14,24,28-30, 111, 117, 137, 148, 155-7, 160,216 Stylistic 18,94,110, 125, 133, 150 Viewpoint 37-9, 70, 73, 75-6, 82, 91,99, 104-6, 142-4, 146-7 Viewpoint operator 37, 39, 70, 82, 91,99,104-6,142-3, 146 Volitive 42
w Whaling 13 Wh-questions 7, 193 Written data 19, 62, 69, 99, 124, 135 Written language 10, 17-18, 22, 30, 88,93, 109-10,117, 119, 133, 150, 156
z Zero copula 7 Zero form 157, 159
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
210
Numbers in bold italics refer to example numbers, numbers without formatting refer to page numbers. Grammatical constructions are written in Standard English orthography and not in IPA, except for the flap (D). coMPLEMentizer 17,57, 62, 64, 78, 5 5 , 9 5 , 1 ^ , 171-2, 174, 181, 183, 185 COMPLetive 68, 94-6,119, 169, 171, 189 CONDitional 133-9 could VERB 62,111-12
ABility 8,14-5,17, 36, 43, 46, 59, 66,107-10,114-16,118,129, 153, 165, 167, 171, 173, 177-8, 186, 188 ACTion 11, 37-43, 55, 62, 74, 84, 87,95, 111, 142,156,163, 172, 174, 176, 178, 183 ADMONitive 140,141-6 Associative 40,42 Associative OBLlGation 8,20, 27-8, 39-40, 84, 87,118,122,125,1279,153, 175, 184
D DEDUCTive JUDgement 147-9,154-5 -deml-gaiz 40, 42 DESlDerative 4, 40, 54, 68, 70-1, 79, 85, 96,103,119,151,156-9, 111, 176, 178-9, 183 DiSASSociative OBLlGation 19,126, 130-2, 175, 186-7
B better/beDa VERB 140,141-6 bin WERE 169-70,179-80,182-3, 185 bumbye 43-5, 53, 173, 175, 182
E EXiSTential 27, 54-5, 69, 82, 84, 104,100,127,153, 163-4, 167, 170, 174-5, 178, 181 NEGated EXiSTential 44,100, 175
c can VERB 8,14-15,17, 36, 43, 46, 59, 66,107-10,113-116,118, 129,153, 165, 167, 171,173, 177-8, 186, 188 cannot VERB 15,19,118-19,1234, 170, 186; as PROHlBitive 84, 122,124
PAST EXiSTential 55, 167, 178,
181
FUTure 17,19, 25, 31-6, 39, 43-6, 50-1, 72, 75-6, 94,102,124-5, 140, 165, 173, 175, 177, 187, 189 211
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
Example Index
212 Example Index
G get (EXiSTential; possessive) 27,32, 35, 54-6, 68-9, 82, 84, 89, 96, 99100,102,104, HI, 153, 163-4, 166, 167, 170, 173-5, 177-8, 181, 183-4, 187 GERund 87 go VERB 11, 38-43, 55, 62, 74, 84, 87,95,111,142,156,163,172, 174, 176, 178, 183 go(i)n(g)lgonna VERB 17,19, 25, 31-6, 39, 43-6, 50-1, 72, 75-6, 94, 102,124-5,140,165,173, 175, 177, 187, 189 gotta/gaDa VERB 8, 20, 27-8,3940, 84, 87,118,122,125,127-9, 153, 175, 184
H had (PAST Existential; PAST possessive) 55, 97, 167, 178, 181 had VERB 97-100, 169-72, 182, 185 have (EXiSTential/POSSessive) 127 have to VERB 19,126,130-2, 175, 186-7
I INABility 15, 44, 57, 70,118-19, 121,123-4, 170, 186 iNTENSified 73,101-2, 111, 164-5 iNTERJection 16, 40, 87 INTRAterminal High Focality 4,15, 30, 42, 55, 59, 62-4, 75-8, 80-6, 88,123, 148,151,164-170, 173, 178, 181-4, 187, 189
High Focality IMMediate now 4, 78, 81-8,136, 170 LOW Focality 69, 70-4, 169, 173
J JUDgement 59,147,150-5 DEDUCTive 147-9,154-5 SPECULative 59,150-3
L like VERB 4, 40, 54, 68, 70-1, 79, 85, 96,103,119,151,156-9, 172, 176, 178-9, 183 LOCative 4,17, 27, 52-3, 70, 87, 148, 168, 170, 181
M might VERB 59,150-3 must VERB 147-9,154-5
N NEGated EXiSTential 44,100, 175 NEGated PAST 27-8, 43, 54, 57, 60,
62, 64, 68, 73, 96, 99, 172, 178-9, 182-3, 185 NEGation 4, 25, 27-30, 34-6, 39, 467, 56, 60, 62, 68, 71, 73, 85-7, 96, 98-9,103,110,119,151,158, 169, 174, 177-82,, 185 neva 27-8, 43, 54, 57, 60, 62, 64, 68, 73, 96, 99, 172, 178-9, 182-3, 185 no can VERB 9,19, 82,117,11920,124, 170, 179, 190; as INABility 44, 57, 70,121,124, 170 nomo 44,100, 175
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
REMote 45,55,173,175,182
Example Index
o
P PAST ABility
62,111-12
PAST ADterminal 16,31, 40-1, 43, 54-6, 68, 82, 85, 96,101,106, 111, 113,143,147-8,153,155, 159, 163-6, 169-70, 172, 175-6, 179-80, 182-3, 185 PAST EXiSTential 55, 68, 97, 167,
178, 181 PAST HABitual 9, 21-2, 42, 52, 73, 89-93,153, 52, 167-8, 173-4, 176 PAST possessive 68, 97, 183-4
pau 68, 94-6,119, 169, 171, 189 PERMissive 113 POLite REQuest 103-6,142 possessive 32, 35, 54, 56, 68-9, 84, 89, 96, 99,100,102,104, 111, 127, 164, 166, 173-4, 177, 181, 183-4, 187 POSTterminal 97-100, 169-72, 182, 185 PROHlBitive 9,19, 82, 84,117,11920,122,124, 170,179, 190
R RELative PRONoun 13 REMote FUTure 43-5, 53, 173, 175, 182
s should VERB 133-6 SPECULative JUDgement 59,150-3 stay (LOCative) 4,17,27, 52-3, 70, 87,148,16%, 170, 181 stay VERB 69, 70-4, 169, 173 stay VERB-wg 4, 78, 81-8,136, 170
T try VERB
103-6,142
V VERB-wg 4,15, 30, 42, 55, 59, 62-4, 75-8, 80-6, 88,123,148, 151, 164-170, 173, 178, 181-4, 187, 189
w wen VERB 16,31, 40-1, 43, 54-66, 68, 82, 85, 96,101,106, 111, 113, 143,147-8,153,155,159, 163-6, 169-70, 172, 175-6, 182
Y yustu VERB 9, 21-2, 42, 52, 73, 8993,153, 52, 167-8, 173-4, 176
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
OBLlGation 8,19-20, 27-8, 39-40, 87,118,125-8,130,153, 175, 184, 186-7 Associative 8,20,27-8,39-40, 84, 87,118,122,125,127-9, 153, 175, 184 DiSASSociative 19,126,130-2, 175, 186-7 ought to VB 137-9
213
I have grouped the informants in four different ways (by age, by gender, by island and by ethnicity), in order to make it easy for the reader to search for specific variational categories. The numbers in bold italics to the right of each entry refer to example numbers (i.e. they should not be confused with the age ofthe informant); the ones to the right of each entry that do not gave any formatting refer to page numbers.
Age
Male Japanese 50 Kaua'i 4, 22, 30, 40, 98, 99, 167-73 Male Portuguese 50 Kaua'i 80, 107,155, 177'-85 60-69 Female Hawaiian 61 Hawai'i 21, 92, 111, 147 Female Hawaiian 64 Moloka'i 128 Female Portuguese 62 Hawai'i 26, 60,127,142 Male Chinese 64 Kaua'i 79 Male Filipino 61 Moloka'i 14 Male Hawaiian 64 Kaua'i 91,154 70-79 Female Hawaiian 70 Moloka'i 113 Female Hawaiian 71 Mau'i 19, 21,39,50, 150 Female Hawaiian 77 Moloka'i 28, 32,109,130,144 Male Chinese 79 Moloka'i 8, 28, 52, 93,105,113 Male Hawaiian 79 Hawai'i 23, 66 Male Japanese 75 Moloka'i 13, 55,57,185-90
20-29 Male Hawaiian 22 Hawai'i 47, 118,152 Male Hawaiian 24 Kaua'i 106 Male Hawaiian 24 Moloka'i 18, 27,49,87,95,117 Male Hawaiian 29 Mau'i 12,16, 20, 25, 55, 56, 89,100,134, 159, 163-7 30-39 Female Portuguese 39 Hawai'i 90,125,126,143 40-49 Female Hawaiian 40 Moloka'i 128 50-59 Female Hawaiian 50 Hawai'i 9 Female Hawaiian 50 Mau'i 19, 39, 42, 68, 96,102,119,156 Female Hawaiian 51 Hawai'i 34, 36, 48, 59, 73,101,110,153, 173-7 Female Hawaiian 58 Moloka'i 14,17,45,46,105,128,130
214 10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
Informant Index
80-89 Male Chinese 88 O'ahu 15 Male Portuguese 85 Kaua'i 35, 74,155, 177-85 90-99 Female Hawaiian 95 Hawai'i 53, 140
Gender Female Hawaiian 40 Moloka'i 128 Hawaiian 50 Hawai'i 9 Hawaiian 50 Mau'i 19, 39, 42, 68, 96,102,119,156 Hawaiian 51 Hawai'i 34,36, 48, 59, 73,101,110,153, 173-7 Hawaiian 58 Moloka'i 14,17,45, 46,105,128,130 Hawaiian 61 Hawai'i 21, 92, 111, 147 Hawaiian 64 Moloka'i 128 Hawaiian 70 Moloka'i 113 Hawaiian 71 Mau'i 19, 21, 39, 50,150 Hawaiian 77 Moloka'i 28, 32, 109,130,144 Hawaiian 95 Hawai'i 53,140 Portuguese 39 Hawai'i 90,125, 126,143 Portuguese 62 Hawai'i 26, 60, 127,142 Male Chinese 64 Kaua'i 79 Chinese 79 Moloka'i 8, 28, 52, 93,105,113 Chinese 88 O'ahu 15 Filipino 61 Moloka'i 14 Hawaiian 22 Hawai'i 47,118, 152 Hawaiian 24 Kaua'i 106
215
Hawaiian 24 Moloka'i 18, 27, 49, 87,95,117 Hawaiian 29 Mau'i 12,16, 20, 25, 55, 56, 89,100,134,159, 163-7 Hawaiian 64 Kaua'i 91,154 Hawaiian 79 Hawai'i 23, 66 Japanese 50 Kaua'i 4, 22, 30, 40, 98, 99, \67-73 Japanese 75 Moloka'i 13, 33, 51, 185-90 Portuguese 50 Kaua'i 80,107, 155, 177-85 Portuguese 85 Kaua'i 35, 74,155, 177-85
Island Hawai'i Female Hawaiian 50 years 9 Female Hawaiian 51 years 34, 36, 48,59,73,101,110,153, 173-7 Female Hawaiian 61 years 21, 92, 111, 147 Female Hawaiian 95 years 53, 140 Female Portuguese 39 years 90, 125,126,143 Female Portuguese 62 years 26, 60,127,142 Male Hawaiian 22 years 47,118, 152 Male Hawaiian 79 years 23, 66 Kaua'i Male Chinese 64 years 79 Male Hawaiian 24 years 106 Male Hawaiian 64 years 91,154 Male Japanese 50 years 4, 22, 30, 40, 98, 99, 167-73 Male Portuguese 50 years 80, 107,155, 177-85
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
Informant Index
Informant Index
Male Portuguese 85 years 35, 74, 155, 177-85 Mau'i Female Hawaiian 50 years 19, 39, 42, 68, 96,102,119,156 Female Hawaiian 71 years 19, 21, 39, 50,150 Male Hawaiian 29 years 12,16, 20, 25, 55, 56, 89,100,134, 159, 163-7 Moloka'i Female Hawaiian 40 years 128 Female Hawaiian 58 years 14,17, 45, 46,105,128,130 Female Hawaiian 64 years 128 Female Hawaiian 70 years 113 Female Hawaiian 77 years 28,32, 109,130,144 Male Chinese 79 years 8, 28, 52, 93,105,113 Male Filipino 61 years 14 Male Hawaiian 24 years 18, 27, 49,87,95,117 Male Japanese 75 years 13, 33, 51, 185-90 O'ahu Male Chinese 88 years 15
Ethnicity Chinese Male 64 Kaua'i 79 Male 79 Moloka'i 8, 28, 52, 93, 105,113 Male 88 O'ahu 15 Filipino Male 61 Moloka'i 14 Hawaiian Female 40 Moloka'i 128
Female 50 Hawai'i 9 Female 50 Mau'i 19, 39, 42, 68, 96,102,119,156 Female 51 Hawai'i 34,36,48, 59, 73,101,110,153, 173-7 Female 58 Moloka'i 14,17,45, 46,105,128,130 Female 61 Hawai'i 21,92,111, 147 Female 64 Moloka'i 128 Female 70 Moloka'i 113 Female 71 Mau'i 19,21,39,50, 150 Female 77 Moloka'i 28, 32,109, 130,144 Female 95 Hawai'i 53,140 Male 22 Hawai'i 47,118,152 Male 24 Kaua'i 106 Male 24 Moloka'i 18, 27, 49, 87, 95,117 Male 29 Mau'i 12,16, 20, 25, 55, 56, 89,100,134,159, 163-7 Male 64 Kaua'i 91,154 Male 79 Hawai'i 23, 66 Japanese Male 50 Kaua'i 4, 22, 30, 40, 98, 99, 167-73 Male 75 Moloka'i 13, 33, 51, 185-90 Portuguese Female 39 Hawai'i 90,125,126, 143 Female 62 Hawai'i 26, 60,127, 142 Male 50 Kaua'i 80,107,155, 177-85 Male 85 Kaua'i 35, 74,155, 17785
10.1057/9780230505858 - Hawai'i Creole English, Viveka Velupillai
Copyright material from www.palgraveconnect.com - licensed to Universitetsbiblioteket i Tromso - PalgraveConnect - 2011-04-24
216